Tga 1 2010 PDF

-
METTLER TOLEDO
Analytical
Branch Office Schwerzenbach

Address Sonnenbergstrasse 74 (Industrie Vieri), 8603 Schwerzenbach, Switzerland
Phone +41 44 806 77 11
Fax +41 44 806 73 50
Hotline +41 44 806 73 83
Hotline TAFPS.Help@mt.com
Service Manual
METTLER TOLEDO Thermal Analysis

TGA/DSC 1
Mettler-Toledo AG 2007-2009 ME-51710474B, Printed in Switzerland Date of issue: October 2009
Current status of service manual

see section 10
— This page remains blank —
−
1
Cautionary notes / Warnings
−
General −
Introduction
Ecology
− Organization of this service manual
− Installation requirements
2 Installation
IQ / OQ
−
−
−
Unpacking
Installation
IQ / OQ
− Instrument types
−
3 Spare Parts Generations

− Spare parts
Service Tools −
−
Hardware service tools
Software service tools
− Instrument / System layout

−
4 Theory of Block diagram

− Interfaces
Operation − Software and Firmware (versions and features)
− Specifications
− General Information
5 Error Messages
Trouble Shooting
−
−
−
−
Error messages
Explanation of the test software
Check lists
Trouble shooting lists
− Routine maintenance
6 Maintenance −
−
−
Corrective maintenance
Final check
Limits of error (OQ)
Replacement − Instruction
−
7
Removing the housing
and − Disassembly / assembly
− Replacement of parts
Repair − Upgrades
Adjustment − Configuration
8 and
Calibration
− Adjustments
− Calibrations
Options
9 and
Accessories
− Options
− Accessories
− Fuses
10 − Circuit diagrams
Drawings PCB layouts
− Interconnections and connector layout
− Test points
− Service manual updates
11 Service
Information
−
−
−
Instrument Express Service Info (ESI)
Options Express Service Info (ESI)
Software Express Service Info (ESI)
− Instrument
12 Operating
Instructions
− Options
− Accessories
TGA/DSC 1 General
CONTENTS PAGE
1 General ................................................................................................................ 1-3

1.1 Cautionary notes ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.1.1 General Safety...................................................................................................... 1-3
1.1.2 Instrument Safety ................................................................................................. 1-4
1.1.3 Electrical Power Safety......................................................................................... 1-4
1.1.4 Compressed Gases Safety................................................................................... 1-5
1.2 Ecology................................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.1 Current waste management ................................................................................. 1-7
1.2.2 Principle of preventive action................................................................................ 1-8
1.3 Organization of this service manual ............................................................... 1-10
Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-1

General TGA/DSC 1
1-2 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

TGA/DSC 1 General
1 General
1.1 Cautionary notes
1.1.1 General Safety
• Read the safety notes in the operating instructions
• It is assumed that you are familiar with the contents of the Operating Instructions
and Service Manual of this product. These instructions provide information on the
function and operation of the instrument
• Only service engineers who have completed a training course specific to the prod-
uct may perform service work. Service documentation will be distributed only to
trained service engineers.
• The service engineer must be familiar with the "safety directives for outsiders" of
the End User Company.
• In service work, the temperature of the furnace must always be below 60 °C and
above 0 °C for low temperature options
• Never touch hot or cold parts with fingers. Depending on the instrument type there
are temperatures between -196 °C and 1600 °C present!
• Use only original packaging for transportation

General TGA/DSC 1
1.1.2 Instrument Safety

• Never plug or unplug connectors and assemblies on the boards when the instrument is
switched on
• Only the parts or assemblies listed as spare parts in the spare parts list should be replaced
• Be careful when moving or changing the position of the instrument. Do not try to lift the
instrument alone. It is very heavy
• Handle glass parts with care!
• Protect the system from toxic and aggressive material
1.1.3 Electrical Power Safety

• When the Instrument is switched on, hazardous voltages are present
• Before opening the Instrument disconnect the power cord
• Inspect area for electrical hazards
• Do not overload circuits
• Keep electrical equipment away from water and dampness
• Always check electrical cords for signs of wear and tear damage
• Be sure to lock out / tag out switches when working on equipment
• In case of an electrical fire, shut off the power and use a fire extinguisher to put out the
fire. Never use water to put out an electrical fire; water used on an electrical fire can result
in a fatal shock.

TGA/DSC 1 General
1.1.4 Compressed Gases Safety

Gas types
Compressed gases present a unique hazard. Depending on the particular gas, there is a
potential for simultaneous exposure to both mechanical and chemical hazards.
Gases may be:
• Flammable or combustible
• Explosive
• Corrosive
• Poisonous
• Inert
• or a combination of hazards
Identification
The contents of any compressed gas cylinder must be clearly identified. Such identification
should be stenciled or stamped on the cylinder or a label.
No compressed gas cylinder should be accepted for use that does not legibly identify its con-
tents by name. If the labeling on a cylinder becomes unclear or an attached tag is unread-
able, the cylinder should be marked "contents unknown" and returned directly to the manu-
facturer.
Never rely on the color of the cylinder for identification. Color coding is not reliable be-
cause cylinder colors may vary with the supplier. Additionally, labels on caps have little value
because caps are interchangeable.
Handling & Use

Please make sure, that all the following rules are handled correctly by the customer and all
service engineers.
• Cylinders must be attached to a bench top, individually to the wall,
placed in a holding cage, or have a non-tip base attached. Chains or
sturdy straps may be used to secure them.
• If a leaking cylinder is discovered, move it to a safe place (if it is safe to
do so) and inform the responsible persons.
• Under no circumstances should any attempt be made to repair a
cylinder or valve!!
• Regulators are gas specific and not necessarily interchangeable! Always make sure
that the regulator and valve fittings are compatible.
• Obtain a copy of the MSDS (Material Safety Data Sheet) of the gases being used. Read
the MSDS thoroughly and become familiar with the gas properties and hazards prior to
use.

General TGA/DSC 1
• Follow all federal, state and local regulations concerning the storage of compressed gas
cylinders. Store gas cylinders in a ventilated and well lit area away from combustible mate-
rials. Separate gases by type and store in assigned locations that can be readily identified.
Store cylinders containing flammable gases separately from oxygen cylinders and other
oxidants by a fire-resistant barrier (having a fire-resistance rating of at least 30 minutes) or
locate them at least 20 feet apart from each other. Store poison, cryogenic and inert gases
separately. If a cylinder's content is not clearly identified by the proper cylinder markings
labels, DO NOT accept it for use.
• Storage areas should be located away from sources of excess heat, open flame or igni-
tion, and not located in closed or sub-surface areas. The area should be dry, cool and well
ventilated. Outdoor storage should be above grade, dry and protected from the extremes
of weather. While in storage, cylinder valve protection caps MUST be firmly in place.
• Arrange the cylinder storage area so that old stock is used first. Empty cylinders should be
stored separately and identified with clear markings. Return empty cylinders promptly.
Some pressure should be left in a depleted cylinder to prevent air suck-back that would al-
low moisture and contaminants to enter the cylinder.
• Do not apply any heating device that will heat any part of a cylinder above 125 °F (52 °C).
Overheating can cause the cylinder to rupture. Neither steel nor aluminum cylinder tem-
peratures should be permitted to exceed 125 °F (52 °C).
• Safety glasses, gloves and safety shoes should be worn at all times when handling cylin-
ders. Always move cylinders by hand trucks or carts that are designed for this purpose.
During transportation, keep both hands on the cylinder cart and secure cylinders properly
to prevent them from falling, dropping or striking each other. Never use a cylinder cart
without a chain or transport a gas cylinder without its valve protection cap firmly in place.
• To begin service from a cylinder, first secure the cylinder and then remove the valve pro-
tection cap. Inspect the cylinder valve for damaged threads, dirt, oil or grease. Remove
any dust or dirt with a clean cloth. If oil or grease is present on the valve of a cylinder
which contains oxygen or another oxidant, do NOT attempt to use it. Such combustible
substances in contact with an oxidant are explosive. Always disconnect equipment from
the cylinder when not in use and return the cylinder valve protection cap to the cylinder.
• Be sure all fittings and connection threads meet properly - never force. Dedicate your
regulator to a single valve connection even if it is designed for different gases. NEVER mix
up threads or use adapters between non-matching equipment and cylinders. Use washers
only if indicated. Never use grease on pipe threads, turn the threads the wrong way, or use
Teflon® tape on the valve threads to prevent leaking.
• When a cylinder is in use, it must be secured with some form of fastener. Floor or wall
brackets are ideal for stationary use. Portable bench brackets are recommended for when
a cylinder must be moved around. Smaller stands are functioning well for small bottle use.

TGA/DSC 1 General
1.2 Ecology
METTLER TOLEDO cares about ecology
1.2.1 Current waste management
defective
parts
Reutilization Reprocessing Treatment
Pretreatment (dismantle, sort, shred, separate)
Repairable parts Recyclable parts Combustible parts Toxic parts
1 2 3 4
Recovery
Hazard substance
Repair of reusable Incineration
management
materials
Further use Reuse Heat recovery Disposal

General TGA/DSC 1
1.2.2 Principle of preventive action

• We try to avoid unnecessary waste.
• We aim to use energy economically and conserve energy resources.
• We deploy advanced ecological technologies.
• We respect environmental regulation to dispose of unavoidable waste.
We add to our instruments a symbol label for

marking of electrical and electronic equipment.
This symbol label should remind you that such
an instrument must be separated from the nor-
mal waste.
The components of the instrument that can be recycled constitute more than 80% of
its total weight.

TGA/DSC 1 General
The spare part list includes a column containing „ “ signs.
Item Description Part no. A/B

1 Hou...... ME – XX XXX XXX A X)
The „ ...“ sign denotes that:
X) the defective spare part should be treated according to the following guideline:
1) Repair Repair the spare part or component.

2) Recovery Deliver the spare part or component to an authorized facility for
further separation and recycling. The remainder of the compo-
nents that cannot be recycled can possibly be disposed as
normal waste and thereby can be heat recovered.
3) Incineration Deliver the spare part or component to an authorized facility for
incineration and heat recovery.
4) Hazard substance mgt. Deliver the spare part or component to an authorized facility for
treatment as toxic waste. These components can be inciner-
ated, chemically processed or disposed as toxic waste.
If you find no possibilities for disposal in your own country, we recommend you to return
printed circuit boards, precious metals or toxic waste to METTLER TOLEDO. Please contact
TAFPS.help@mt.com for this matter. METTLER TOLEDO has good connections with au-
thorized disposal and recycling facilities.
Example: Disposing of a spare part

Item Description Part no. A/B
67 Heating unit with socket SF1100 ME – 51 142 124 A 1) 2)4)
This spare part consists of metal, ceramics and rubber (O-rings).

1) This unit is repairable. Parts of the heating unit can be replaced. Æ Further reuse is
possible.
2) This unit is not repairable any more Æ deliver the complete spare part to an authorized
facility for reprocessing. If an authorized recycling facility is not available Æ deliver the
complete spare part to an authorized facility for toxic waste treatment. A procedure is
possible but not recommendable, because a full recycling of the components is not
guaranteed.
4) This unit contains toxic components Æ deliver the complete spare part to an authorized
facility for toxic waste.
We thank you for considering these environmental issues.

General TGA/DSC 1
1.3 Organization of this service manual

The header of each page in this manual contains both the instrument type and the name of
the section. The footer contains the section and page number, the month and year of the
issue and the order number of this manual.
Instrument types covered by this Service Manual

This manual covers the Instruments, which are listed at the beginning of section 3 (Instru-
ment Types and Instrument Generations).
Service Manual updates

Every update will be announced in the so-called “Service Bulletin”. It shows you the sections
that have to be replaced. Please download a copy from the extranet www.mtanainfo.com
and print it out to keep your service manual up to date. See also section 11 for previous up-
dates.
Express Service Information (ESI)

As the name suggests, an ESI is a fast way of providing important information about
changes made to hardware and software. The information can also relate to operation and
handling problems. The ESI is forwarded by e-mail to the owner of a service manual. Please
make your own hard copy and file it into Section 11 of your service manual.
Further help
If this manual does not contain the information necessary to solve a problem, service engi-
neers can contact the METTLER TOLEDO help line for support:
Service Contact addresses:
• TAFPS.Help@mt.com Service Hotline
• Phone: + 41 44 806 7383 Service Hotline
• FAX: + 41 44 806 7260 For service support
Application Contact addresses:
• mailto:TAFP.Help@mt.com Application Hotline
• Phone: + 41 44 806 7344 Application Hotline
• FAX: + 41 44 806 7240 For application support
Other Information:
• http://www.mtanainfo.com Analytical support information
• http://www.mt.com/TA METTLER TOLEDO TA Homepage
• http://www.mt.com METTLER TOLEDO Homepage

TGA/DSC 1 General

General TGA/DSC 1
— End of this section —

TGA/DSC 1 Installation / IQ/OQ
CONTENTS PAGE
2 Installation / IQ/OQ ........................................................................................... 2-3

2.1 Notes on Installations ........................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 Installation requirements ................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.1 Working area ........................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.2 Mains connections ................................................................................................ 2-4
2.2.3 Thermostat (Cryostat)........................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 Gas supplies......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.3 Installation........................................................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Installing the instrument........................................................................................ 2-5
2.3.2 Removing the transport protection........................................................................ 2-8
2.3.3 Configuring the TCP/IP address ......................................................................... 2-12
2.4 IQ / OQ ............................................................................................................... 2-16
2.4.1 Installation Qualification, IQ ................................................................................ 2-16
2.4.2 Operation Qualification, OQ................................................................................ 2-16
2.4.3 Terminology used ............................................................................................... 2-16

Installation / IQ/OQ TGA/DSC 1

2 Installation / IQ/OQ
2.1 Notes on Installations
Environment:
A well-chosen location for the TGA/DSC 1 is essential for reliable and precise measurement
results.
The TGA/DSC 1 is designed to operate trouble-free at temperatures between +10 °C and

+31 °C and relative humidity between 20% and 80%. The ambient temperature should not
vary more than ±2 K.
Direct exposure of the instrument to sunlight and strong air currents (which can occur near
air conditioners, electric fans, open doors and open windows) should be avoided.
Also avoid any kind of vibrations that can be caused for example by elevators or the
movement of heavy equipment in the same room or on the same table.
The effect of vibrations is reduced by installing the instrument on a suitable table. (See next
page).
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Electromagnetic fields are present everywhere in our environment. They can cause interfer-
ence and affect the performance of the TGA/DSC 1 by creating artifacts.
When choosing the installation location for the TGA/DSC 1, please avoid the following elec-
tromagnetic disturbances:
• There should be no power lines, motors or similar devices near the instrument. Check the
neighboring rooms as well.
• Make sure that the following minimum distances are kept between the TGA/DSC 1and the
following devices:
- 0.5 m to a PC
- 1.0 m to a printer or a plotter with a power supply transformer
- 1.2 m to a cryostat
- 1.0 m to any lamp with a fluorescent tube
- 5.0 m to a refrigerator or a deep freezer
- All other types of electrical equipment are possible sources of interference and should
therefore kept away from the TGA/DSC 1
• Do not use mobile phones, radio transmission equipment or similar devices during meas-
urements.

2.2 Installation requirements

2.2.1 Working area
The TGA/DSC 1 is a very sensitive high-resolution measuring instrument. To eliminate or
reduce any possible vibrations during the measurement, it is a must to install the TGA/DSC 1
on a stone bench. Details see operating manual section 4.
Install the instruments gas outlet to a filtered exhaust if you measure substances that de-
compose and evolve toxic gases.
For the weight and the dimensions of the TGA/DSC 1 please refer to section 11 in the oper-
ating manual.
2.2.2 Mains connections
Voltage During factory assembly, the instrument is built for 115 V or

230 V alternating current 50 Hz or 60 Hz. The built-in voltage
range cannot be changed.
Frequency 50 or 60 Hz
Voltage tolerance ± 10%
Current supply 115 V / 12 A; 230 V / 6 A
Maximum load 600 VA / 800 VA
2.2.3 Thermostat (Cryostat)

For thermo stating the balance and the cooling of the furnace a thermostat is required. De-
tails and specification see section 3 of the operating manual.
2.2.4 Gas supplies

Depending on the application, purge gas, protective gas, or both are used.
Details see section 4 of the operating manual.
Flow meters
For adjusting the gas flow rate, flow meters with the following flow ranges should be used:
• Protective gas flow rate (dry gas for low temperature) 0 – 100 ml/min
• Purge gas flow rate: 0 – 200 ml/min

2.3 Installation
Information: The TGA/DSC 1 is shipped in several parts. This requires an installa-

tion by a service engineer. During this installation also the sample
robot option can be installed.
Requirements
Operating Instructions of the TGA/DSC 1 and the Sample Robot
Service Manual of the TGA/DSC 1 and Sample Robot
Important Note: The Balance must always stay upright. Otherwise it could be seri-
ously damaged.
2.3.1 Installing the instrument

For drawings and more details see section 7(general) or 9 (sample robot).
• Unpack the instrument, put the main part (chassis) on a table and remove its housings
(see 7.2).
• Check that the identification on the balance housing fits the one on the balance electron-
ics (can be found below the big heat sink on the rear side of the instrument). These two
identification numbers must match.
• Remove the sheet metal cover from the mounting cover
bracket (Photo).
• Pull the water hoses from their storage in the
chassis and arrange them to be connected later
(see below).
• Lay the furnace beside the chassis, guide the two
cables from it through the mounting bracket and
connect the 9 pin connector to the chassis. Mount
the bracket with the furnace heating connector to
the chassis (use the screw which is already in its
place). Cover fixed to the mounting bracket
• Plug into it the connector from the furnace power supply (Photos).
Heating connector for SF and LF Heating connector for HT

• Mount the balance (including the furnace drive) onto the three poles. Put the rear part of
the balance insulation in its place and connect the two cables to the balance. Also con-
nect the cable to the power supply and connect the two red water hoses to the balance.
• Put the remaining parts of insulation onto the balance housing (see next page).
• Install the sample robot if applicable (see 9.1).
• Fix the furnace to the furnace drive with its 2 screws (the red knurled screw onto the tooth
bar in the front).
• Adjust “furnace closed” if necessary.
• Remove the transport protection and install the sensor (see 2.3.2)
• Connect the cryostat and the protective gas (see Operating Instruction). Check for leaks.
• Fix the housings.
• Configure the TCP/IP address (2.3.3).
• Import the calibration data of the instrument from the delivered CD into the STARe PC and
perform check measurements.
Tubing of TGA/DSC 1

Balance Insulation (seen from the front)

2.3.2 Removing the transport protection

Cautionary notes:
• The microbalance is a very sensitive instrument
• Never tilt the balance to the side
• Make sure, that there is no dust inside the balance housing
• Give attention to the contact gold wires
1. Install the balance assembly into the TGA/DSC 1 before you remove the transportation
protection
2. Open the balance housing
3. Carefully remove the two (different) pieces of rubber foam carefully upwards

4. Mounting the overload protection bar:
a. Do not turn the protection bar adjustment screw (a)
(a)
b. Carefully insert the protection bar into the protection bar hole

c. Fix the protection bar with the two retaining screws onto the Adjustment block.
d. The protection bar must not touch the surrounding protection bar hole.
5. Mount the cold junction board.

• The big capacitor on the printed circuit board is a useful grip
• Pay attention to the contact pins on the bottom side!
• Put a screw in one of the corresponding fixing holes
• Slide the board carefully downwards into the correct position, give attention to the
contacts of the gold wires

6. Connect the flat cable to the cold junction board
7. Check with sensor the connection and free running of the balance parts
8. Close the balance housing

2.3.3 Configuring the TCP/IP address

Note:
This instruction describes the complete procedure from the beginning including the neces-
sary Windows configurations. Depending on the configuration of the customer’s network and
your own experience you may take shortcuts where appropriate.
1. Find out which IP-address needs to be configured within the TGA/DSC 1.

a) If the TGA/DSC 1in question shall be connected to a company’s network you need to
get a static IP-address from the company’s IT department.
b) If the TGA/DSC 1will be set up in an independent ‘stand alone network’ you can theo-
retically define any IP-address.
Recommendation: Reserve from the address range designated for local networks a
256 block. 192.168.xxx.yyy.
Select xxx, class C net and reserve this consecutive 256-address block for all con-
cerned instruments.
2. For the following steps you need a PC with local administrative rights
(e.g. as user Ingres).
3. Shut down the PC, connect the crossed Ethernet cable to the TGA/DSC 1, start the PC.
4. Execute a right mouse click on ‚My Network Places:

5. With a right mouse click select Properties from the active / to be used
LocalAreaConnection. No other Internet connection should be active!
6. Choose the General tab, select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click on properties.

7. Configure the PC with a valid IP-address and subnet mask.

Valid is an address which starts with the same address group as the to be defined (re-
served) IP-address of the TGA/DSC 1.
8. Start the TAService Tool, go to Settings and select Lantronix XPort…

Make sure that in the directory where the TAService Tool is located there is also the file
“XportSetup.cfg”.

9. With the TGA/DSC 1 switched on, key in the MAC address which you can find on the
sheet accompanying this instrument. If this sheet is missing you can find the MAC ad-
dress written on the Lantronix XPort module which is mounted on the rear wall of the mi-
croprocessor board box.
10. If the configuration was successful you should get the following Message.
Make sure the line “Xport setup file executed: ‘XportSetup.cfg’ is present. If not, the
system will probably not work!
192.168.1.34
11. The module is now configured and is ready for being used.
12. Reset the computer to the status it had before (IP address automatic, DNS server auto-
matic). Connect the TGA/DSC 1 to the customer’s network.

2.4 IQ / OQ
Please refer to the Thermal Analysis Logbook delivered with the instrument. The logbook
should be used for documenting the results of the installation, the initial and subsequent
calibrations and certification, the system suitability tests and possible method validation. It
contains the entire documentation for the period of validation as well as every change of
hardware and software.
The logbook should be kept near the instrument at all times. It should be moved with the in-
strument when it is relocated.
The laboratory manager is responsible for maintaining the logbook. He is responsible to

keep it up to date.
2.4.1 Installation Qualification, IQ

Describes the installation and initial operation of the system as well as its current configura-
tion (module type, software version, option etc.) If necessary, any peripheral devices (e.g.
printer, balance, computer, etc.) that are permanently assigned to this TA system can be
documented on supplementary sheets.
2.4.2 Operation Qualification, OQ

This includes the check of the guaranteed performance data of the TA system (depending on
the module temperature, heat flow, weight or length) by an authorized METTLER TOLEDO
service engineer according to METTLER TOLEDO test procedures. This check is performed
after the installation and before the first use of the TA system.
The results of this check are entered in the calibration certificate and are filled in the appro-
priate section of the logbook.
The OQ includes a short operation test (general system suitability test, general SST) whose
results are entered into the logbook.
2.4.3 Terminology used

Calibration:
The determination of the relationship between the indicated value and the true value of the
measured quantity (quantities) using certified and traceable reference test material(s).
Adjustment:
The operation of optimizing the performance of an instrument so that the indicated value lies
within the specified limits of error.
Error limits:
The specified extreme values for permitted deviations from a measurement value for an in-
strument. The specified error limits apply in both the positive and negative direction ±. If
these values are exceeded, then the deviations are errors (old terms: accuracy, tolerance).



TGA/DSC 1 Spare Parts, Service Tools
CONTENTS PAGE
3 Spare Parts, Service Tools ................................................................................ 3-3

3.1 Instrument versions ........................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Generations......................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 Exploded view diagrams with part lists............................................................ 3-4
3.3.1 Housing and outside parts .................................................................................... 3-4
3.3.2 Electronic components ........................................................................................ 3-6
3.3.3 Communication Boards ........................................................................................ 3-8
3.3.4 Furnace parts ....................................................................................................... 3-9
3.3.5 Front module parts (without furnace).................................................................. 3-14
3.3.6 Special cables for balance.................................................................................. 3-16
3.3.7 Special service assemblies................................................................................. 3-17
3.3.8 Sensors .............................................................................................................. 3-19
3.4 Hardware service tools .................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.1 Service tools Balance ......................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.2 Service tools Electronics..................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.3 Adhesive material ............................................................................................... 3-21
3.4.4 Service tools Sample Robot ............................................................................... 3-22
3.4.5 Sample robot tool kit (ME – 51 141 982) ........................................................... 3-22
3.4.6 List of lubricants and lubrication instructions ...................................................... 3-23
3.5 Software Service tools for TGA/DSC 1 ........................................................... 3-25
3.5.1 TAServiceTool .................................................................................................... 3-25

Spare Parts, Service Tools TGA/DSC 1

3 Spare Parts, Service Tools

3.1 Instrument versions
TGA/DSC 1 small furnace (SF) 1100 °C
TGA/DSC 1 large furnace (LF) 1100 °C
TGA/DSC 1 high temperature (HT) 1600 °C
3.2 Generations
Introduction of the TGA/DSC 1: August 2007

3.3 Exploded view diagrams with part lists

3.3.1 Housing and outside parts
9 13 1 7
10
11
14
12
15 8

Item Description 1 2 3 4 Part number A/B*

1 Rear housing (ME – 51 142 301) B 3)
2 Front housing left ME – 51 142 626 A 3)
3 Front housing right (ME – 51 142 302) B 3)
4 Cover (steel) (ME – 51 142 609) B 2)
5 Frame (ME – 51 142 306) B 3)
6 Set of fittings (Serto) ME – 51 142 749 A 2)
7 SmartSens Terminal complete ME – 51 150 032 A 2)
7a Cable for Terminal See Item 37
8 Water nipple ME – 51 141 917 A 2)
Nut ME – 00 076 507 A 2)
9 Glass cover ME – 51 142 300 A 2)
10 Holder for crucibles ME – 51 142 312 A 3)
11 Protective cover ME – 51 142 628 A 3)
12 Screw M8 x 12 ME – 51 195 812 A 2)
13 Warning sign ME – 51 142 637 A 3)
14 Knurled screw ME – 51 142 265 A 2)
15 Fan furnace power amplifier Artesyn 400 W ME – 51 190 606 A 2)
Air filter Artesyn 400 W ME – 51 190 607 A 3)
*A = Standard spare parts available from MT-LOG *B = These parts must be ordered via the Help line
1)
Repair Repair the spare part or component
2)
Recovery Deliver the spare part or component to an authorized facility for further separation and recycling. The remainder
of the components that can not be recycled can possible be disposed as normal waste and thereby can be heat
recovered.
3)
Incineration Deliver the spare part or component to an authorized facility for incineration and heat recovery.
4)
Hazard substance mgt. Deliver the spare part or component to an authorized facility for treatment as toxic waste. These components
can be incinerated, chemically processed or disposed as toxic waste.

3.3.2 Electronic components

27
21 28
22 29
23 30
45
31
32
24
33
37
34
35
26
36


21 Line filter ME – 00 085 480 A 2)
22 Mains transformer ME – 51 141 580 A 2)
23 Switched line socket (option) See section 9
24 Processor board ME – 51 150 006 A 2)
26 Analog board ME – 51 650 102 A 2)
27 Voltage selector (ME – 00 088 389) B 3)
28 Power switch 230 V / 10 A ME – 51 190 180 A 3)
Power switch 115 V / 16 A ME – 51 190 262 A 3)
29 Power receptacle ME – 00 089 788 A 3)
30 Power plug ME – 00 089 787 A 3)
31 Peripheral board (option) See section 9
32 Stepper motor control board ME – 51 150 005 A 2)
33 Power supply board ME – 51 150 004 A 2)
34 Fuse holder (ME – 00 089 309) B 3)
35 Furnace power amplifier (400 W for 1100 °C) ME – 51 143 097 A 2)
Furnace power amplifier (600 W for 1600 °C) ME – 51 143 099 A 2)
Air filter for furnace power amplifier see pos 15
Fan for furnace power amplifier see pos 15
36 Thermocouple board (PCB for DTA / DSC-Sensors) ME – 51 150 010 A 2)
Thermocouple board kit (including cable and screws) ME – 51 142 483 A 2)
37 Cable for Terminal (ME – 51 191 813) B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

3.3.3 Communication Boards

The communication boards are mounted to the rear panel and connected to the µProcessor
board. The Ethernet-Module complete is the standard communication board between the
TA-module and the computer where the STARe software is running. The RS232-Module
complete is used to communicate with the gas controllers.
172
171
Item Part description 1 2 3 4 Part No. A/B*

171 RS232-Module complete (ME-51 142 016) ME – 51 150 008 A 2)
172 Ethernet-Module complete (ME-51 142 019) ME – 51 150 009 A 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

3.3.4 Furnace parts 51 54

Small furnace (1100 °C) 55
91 92 88 90 93
52
53
60 61 63 73 57 58 59
62
64 72 70 77
67 65 71 73
74 66 72 75 76

Large furnace (1100 °C)

51 54
55
52
53
60 61 63 73 85 86 57 58 59
62
84 64 72 70 83 88 89 90 77
82 80 71 73
81 72 75 76

High temperature furnace (1600 °C)

51 54
56
52
53
60 61 63 73 85 86 57 58 59
62
84 64 72 70 83 88 89 90 77
95 71 73
72 75 76


51 Gas connector M5, double sided turnable ME – 51 191 764 A 2)
52 Gas connector M5, single sided turnable ME – 51 191 763 A 2)
53 Nippel M5 ME – 51 191 765 A 2)
54 Tubing transparent (product sold by meter) ME – 00 072 472 A 3)
55 Connector 3 pin SF, LF ME – 00 089 844 A 2)
56 Connector 3 pin HT ME – 51 190 524 A 2)
57 Cooling jacket (ME – 51 142 130) B 1) 2)
58 Cooling inner cylinder (ME – 51 142 129) B 1) 2)
59 Furnace insulation ME – 51 142 133 A 3)
60 Vacuum flange ME – 51 142 180 A 2)
61 O-ring complete (including metal ring) ME – 51 190 467 A 2)
62 Clamp ME – 51 140 535 A 2)
63 Furnace flange ME – 51 142 126 A 2)
64 Spring ME – 51 191 803 A 2)
65 Sleeve SF(2 required) ME – 51 026 501 A 3)
66 Heating element SF 1100 ME – 51 142 123 A 2)
67 Heating unit with socket SF 1100 ME – 51 142 124 A 2)
70 Furnace sealing back ME – 51 142 148 A 3)
71 Furnace sealing front ME – 51 142 141 A 3)
72 O-Ring 42.52 x 2.62 FPM ME – 00 115 012 A 3)
73 O-Ring 21.89 x 2.62 CHEMRAZ 615 ME – 51 191 678 A 3)
74 O-Ring 13.95 x 2.62 CHEMRAZ 615 ME – 51 191 677 A 3)
75 O-Ring 47.3 x 2.62 NBR ME – 51 190 208 A 3)
76 EMV-O-Profile 4 ME – 51 191 791 A 2)
77 CJ Furnace-Board ME – 51 140 867 A 2)
80 Sleeve LF (2 required) ME – 51 119 909 A 2)
81 Heating element LF 1100 ME – 51 142 146 A 2)
82 Heating unit with socket LF 1100 ME – 51 142 147 A 2)
83 Ring steel ME – 51 142 197 A 2)
84 O-Ring 2.62 x 9.92 FPM ME – 00 071 711 A 3)
85 Furnace outlet tube (ceramic) ME – 51 142 134 A 3)
86 Furnace outlet reflector disk ceramic, (set of 6 pieces) ME – 51 142 738 A 3)
87 Furnace outlet reflector complete (85 + 6 x 86) ME – 51 142 036 A 3)
88 Cell reflector disk ceramic (set of 6 pieces) ME – 51 142 736 A 3)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)


89 Gas pipe (LF, HT) (ME – 51 142 033) B 3)
90 O-Ring 2.5 x 0.65 (ME – 51 191 802) B 3)
91 Gas pipe (SF) (ME – 51 026 519) B 3)
92 Adapter (SF) (ME – 51 142 279) B 2)
93 Gas pipe assembly small furnace (90, 91, 92, mounted) ME – 51 142 737 A 2), 4)
95 Heating unit with socket HT 1600 1 2 3 4 ME – 51 142 137 A 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

3.3.5 Front module parts (without furnace)
121 122 123 124 125
127 128 129 132 124 130 131 132
135 136


121 Tubing red (piece of 1 meter) ME - 51 191 479 A 3)
122 O-Ring 26 x 3 (ME – 51 191 679) B 2)
123 Water level complete (ME – 51 142 053) B 2)
124 Sealing plate ME – 51 141 837 A 2)
Sealing foil ME – 51 141 875 A 3)
Screw M3 x 6 (ME – 51 195 306) B 2)
125 Connecting piece ME – 51 414 836 A 2)
Sealing foil ME – 51 141 875 A 3)
Screw M3 x 20 (ME – 51 195 320) B 2)
127 Furnace power cable ME – 51 142 111 A 2)
128 Furnace data cable ME – 51 142 106 A 2)
129 Crucible collecting plate ME – 51 142 119 A 3)
130 Furnace drive motor complete ME – 51 141 474 A 2)
131 Housing screw ME – 51 142 265 A 2)
132 Furnace position end switch ME – 51 191 201 A 2)
133 Furnace position PCB ME – 51 150 013 A 2)
135 Preamplifier PCB ME – 51 150 012 A 2)
136 O-Ring 183.83 x 2.62 FKM ME – 51 191 680 A 2)
137 O-Ring ME – 51 191 679
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

3.3.6 Special cables for balance

141 Cable processor board – balance electronics (ME – 51 142 110) B 2)
142 Cable balance electronics – balance (ME – 51 142 104) B 2)
143 Cable balance – analog board (ME – 51 142 105) B 2)
144 Cable balance electronics – bower supply board (ME – 51 142 109) B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

3.3.7 Special service assemblies

Furnaces complete
151
152
153

151 Small furnace 1100 °C complete (ME – 51 142 121) B 2)
152 Large furnace 1100 °C complete (ME – 51 142 144) B 2)
153 High temperature furnace 1600 °C complete (ME – 51 142 127) B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

Balance parts
156
155

155 UMX5-Balance with matched electronics (ME – 51 150 051) B 2)
156 Balance analysis electronics Order via Hotline B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

3.3.8
3.8 Sensors 161
162
163
164
165

161 TGA SDTA FRS2 Sensor SF (small furnace) ME – 51 142 095 A 2)
162 TGA SDTA FRS2 Sensor LF (large furnace) ME – 51 142 097 A 2)
163 TGA SDTA FRS2 Sensor HT (high temperature) ME – 51 142 094 A 2)
164 TGA DTA FRS2 Sensor LF / HT ME – 51 142 091 A 2)
165 TGA DSC HSS2 Sensor LF / HT ME – 51 142 078 A 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)


3.4 Hardware service tools

3.4.1 Service tools Balance
Part description Usage Part No.
Calibration weight 1gr certified Reproducibility test (with sample robot) ME – 00 158 391
Calibration weight 0.2 g, 1 g, 5 g certified Linearity (with sample robot) ME – 11 116 761
Calibration weight 1 to 500 mg certified Linearity (sample robot not possible) ME – 00 158 801
3.4.2 Service tools Electronics

TGA/DSC 1 1 test plug kit Analog board adjustments (consisting of ME – 51 142 743
ME – 51 142 741 and ME – 51 142 742)
3.4.3 Adhesive material

Ceramabond (ceramic glue) for all instruments ME – 00 071 302
Silicon rubber for all instruments ME – 00 073 041

3.4.4 Service tools Sample Robot
ME – 51 140 519
Dummy pan
used for DSC and TGA
ME – 51 140 406
Gauge block
used for lid piercing option
ME – 51 119 814
Gauge block
used for TGA
ME – 51 140 479
Centering ring for gauge block
used for TGA
ME – 51 140 510
Adjustment tool for gripper
(included with each gripper)
3.4.5 Sample robot tool kit (ME – 51 141 982)

Including the following parts:
ME – 51 140 519 Dummy pan used for DSC and TGA
ME – 00 119 466 Height adjustment gauge, used only for DSC
ME – 00 119 469 Adjustment foil, used only for DSC
ME – 51 140 406 Gauge block used for lid piercing option
ME – 51 119 814 Gauge block used for TGA
ME – 51 140 479 Centering ring for gauge block used for TGA

3.4.6 List of lubricants and lubrication instructions

Available lubricants
ME – 51 141 960 Molykote HP – 870

for all instruments
(Old type: BG87)
ME – 51 141 961 Molykote PG - 30L

for all instruments
Valvoline DAB 15
ME-51141962
METTLER TOLEDO
ME – 51 141 962 Valvoline DAB 15
for all instruments
(Old type: Pacific slickpac)
ME – 51 141 959 DOW Corning 111

Silicon grease for O-Rings

ME - 51 141 960 ME - 51 141 961 ME - 51 141 962 ME – 51 141 959

Lubrication concept for Molykote Molykote Valvoline DOW CORNING
HP - 870 PG – 30L DAB 15 111
excellence modules If re- Every If re- Every If re- Every If re- Every
quired 2 years quired 2 years quired 2 years quired 2 years
Automatic furnace lid X

DSC 1
Thread on the feet X

Furnace drive bars X
TGA/DSC 1
Tooth bar on furnace drive bar X

Thread on the feet X
O - Rings X
Tooth bar on drive bar
Sample Robot
X
Drive bars X
Robot lift bars X
controller
Valve screw X
Gas
gas adjusting valve X

All Teflon bearings X
All screws ≥ M5 (thread) X
General
All cog wheels X

All O-Rings X

3.5 Software Service tools for TGA/DSC 1

3.5.1 TAServiceTool
The TAServiceTool (TaServiceTool.exe) can be downloaded from the extranet
(www.mtanainfo.com). Make sure, that you use always the newest version.
This TAServiceTool must be used for DSC 1 and TGA/DSC 1.


TGA/DSC 1 Theory of Operation
CONTENTS PAGE
4 Theory of Operation ........................................................................................... 4-3

4.1 Mechanical layout............................................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Differences to a standard microbalance........................................................... 4-4
4.3 Electrical layout .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.3.1 System layout ....................................................................................................... 4-5
4.4 Block diagram..................................................................................................... 4-6
4.5 Interfaces............................................................................................................. 4-7
4.6 Line-Module ........................................................................................................ 4-8
4.7 Power supply board ......................................................................................... 4-10
4.7.1 Board version coding .......................................................................................... 4-11
4.7.2 +24 V supply voltage .......................................................................................... 4-11
4.7.3 +5.1 V supply voltage ......................................................................................... 4-11
4.7.4 +12.0 V supply voltage ....................................................................................... 4-11
4.7.5 ±15 V supply voltage .......................................................................................... 4-12
4.7.6 +12 V supply voltage .......................................................................................... 4-12
4.7.7 -10.8 V supply voltage ........................................................................................ 4-12
4.7.8 Voltage monitoring.............................................................................................. 4-12
4.7.9 Furnace power supply control............................................................................. 4-13
4.7.10 Furnace position control ..................................................................................... 4-13
4.7.11 Line out............................................................................................................... 4-13
4.7.12 General............................................................................................................... 4-13
4.8 µProcessor board ............................................................................................. 4-14
4.9 SmartSens terminal .......................................................................................... 4-15
4.10 Analog board TGA/DSC 1 ................................................................................ 4-16
4.11 Thermocouple amplifier board ........................................................................ 4-17
4.12 Furnace power amplifier .................................................................................. 4-18
4.12.1 Inputs.................................................................................................................. 4-18
4.12.2 Output................................................................................................................. 4-18
4.12.3 Miscellaneous..................................................................................................... 4-18
4.13 Furnace position detection.............................................................................. 4-19
4.14 Firmware (Versions and features)................................................................... 4-20
4.15 Technical data................................................................................................... 4-20

Theory of Operation TGA/DSC 1

4 Theory of Operation
4.1 Mechanical layout
See section 3.3.1 for housing and outside parts
See section 3.3.2 for electronic components
27
21 28
22 29
23 30
45
31
32
24
33
37
34
35
26
36

4.2 Differences to a standard microbalance

In preparation

4.3 Electrical layout

4.3.1 System layout
Power supplies
The line voltage must lie within one of the following two ranges (including power supply sys-
tem tolerances):
90 V...132 V 50/60 Hz (Line voltage selector: 115 V)

The line voltage is not selectable!

The line voltage distribution can be seen in section 10.
The following electronic power supplies are generated in the instrument:
24 V Secondary switching regulator final controlling elements

5.1 V Secondary switching regulator digital electronics
±15 V Linear regulator analog electronics
12.0 V Linear regulator for SmartSens terminal
12.0 V Linear regulator balance TGA/DSC 1 module
-10.8 V Linear regulator balance TGA/DSC 1 module
0V ... 50 V Primary switching regulator furnace heating (FPA)
7 micro fuses protect all these power supplies on the AC side (5 fuses at the top of the line
module, 2 fuses at back of the line module. Further auxiliary supply voltages are derived lo-
cally from the above power supplies (see board description).

4.4 Block diagram

In preparation

4.5 Interfaces
In preparation

4.6 Line-Module
SI 2
Line out 600 VA Line out
Switched
line socket
Line relay on / off

from PS board
Line in Line out 500 VA

Main- to furnace power
I : 90...132 V
switch amplifier
II : 180...264 V
SI 1
Line-
filter
Voltage-
selector
SI 3
31 VAC
SI 4
Transformer 22 VAC
SI 5
50 / 60 Hz 22 VAC to PS-Board
SI 6
18 VAC
SI 7
16 VAC

Line voltage distribution

The line voltage must lie in one of the following two ranges (including power supply system
tolerances):

The line voltage (primary side) is distributed in the TGA/DSC 1 as follows:

Via the power switch, the line filter, the primary fuse and the voltage selector to the line
transformer.
Via the power switch and the iron-core reactor to the furnace power supply (the line filter, the
primary fuses and the voltage selector are in/on the furnace power supply).
Via the SW-controlled line relay and a fuse to the second line output socket (for cryostat or
the like).
The 2 fuses and the current overprotection switch (within the power switch) of the primary
side are on the rear of the module.
Secondary voltages
31 VAC +20 / 25%; 150 VA Fuse SI 3 5 AT (slow blow)
2 x 22 VAC +20 / 25%; 40 VA Fuse SI 4 1.25 AT (slow blow)
Fuse SI 5 1.25 AT (slow blow)
18 VAC +20 / 25%; 12 VA Fuse SI 6 1.26 AT (slow blow)
16 VAC +20 / 25%; 3 VA Fuse SI 7 0.25 AT (slow blow)
Miscellaneous
The power distribution and the optional switched line socket are implemented in the line
module. The secondary voltages are brought to the power supply board via a 9-pin connec-
tor (within the module). The control line for the SW-controlled switched line socket is plugged
into the power supply board of the power supply module.

4.7 Power supply board

+24 V
SmartSens terminal
+12.0 V
+24 V
from line ≈ ≈
transformer +5.1 V
(31 VAC)
+24 V +5.1 V
PWR_FAIL
from line ≈
transformer Balance PS (TGA 1)
(18 V / 16 VAC) + 12 V
-10.8 V
PS PS_OK
Monitor
from line ≈
transformer ±15 V
(2 x 22 VAC)
±15 V
from C Board Security Furnace_Power On/Off

Circuit
from Analog Board
D
from C Board Furnace_Control
A
from C Board
Furnace
Lid Logic Furnace Lid Stepper Power
from Furn OP/CL Det.
from C Board Furnace Fan Power
Board to C Board
Var. Det.
from C Board Line Relais Power

PS
from C Board to Peripheral Control Board

4.7.1 Board version coding

The technical standard of the board is coded during assembly by 2 resistors (each wired to
+5.1 V or GND Î version 0 ... 3). The board version can be read using the test/service SW
and checked for compatibility with the other boards and the SW by means of the supple-
mentary sheet "SW/HW versions".
4.7.2 +24 V supply voltage

This supply voltage is generated from the 31 VAC by means of a fully integrated switching
controller. It is used to supply the motors, relays, the fan and the valves. When its input volt-
age falls below typically 24 V, the same controller generates a PWR_FAIL signal, OR wired
with the +5 V switching regulator.
Technical data
Voltage tolerance: ±0.65 V
Maximum output current: 2A
Operating frequency: 100 kHz
4.7.3 +5.1 V supply voltage

This supply voltage is generated from the31VAC by a fully integrated switching controller. It
is used to supply the digital circuit elements. When its input voltage falls below typically
15.0 V, the same controller generates a PWR_FAIL signal. This (together with that of the
24V controller) is wired to the NMI of the μC (Î PWR_FAIL routine). As this power supply is
stable before the +24 V power supply, the SW monitors the PWR-FAIL signal in the
POWER_UP and does not continue until the +24 V is also stable.
Technical data
Voltage tolerance: -0.30/+0.10 V
Maximum output current: 3A
Operating frequency: 100 kHz
4.7.4 +12.0 V supply voltage

This supply voltage is generated from the +24 V by means of a fully integrated linear con-
troller. It is used to supply the SmartSens terminal.
Technical data
Maximum output current: 0.2 A

4.7.5 ±15 V supply voltage

This supply voltage is generated from the 2 x 22 VAC by means of two fully integrated linear
controllers. It is used to supply the analog circuit elements.
Technical data
4.7.6 +12 V supply voltage

This supply voltage is generated from the 18 VAC by means of a fully integrated linear con-
troller. It is used to supply the balance in the TGA/DSC 1 module.
Technical data
4.7.7 -10.8 V supply voltage

This supply voltage is generated from the 16 VAC by means of a fully integrated linear con-
troller. It is used to supply the balance in the TGA/DSC 1 module.
Technical data
4.7.8 Voltage monitoring

The watchdog circuit tests the power supplies ±15 V, +12 V and -10.8 V for failure and gen-
erates a status signal. The SW tests this signal periodically and "shuts down" the
TGA/DSC 1 in the event of a fault (IDLE FURNACE OFF). The monitoring circuit and the
status signal are metallically separated.
Safety monitoring
This watchdog circuit does not switch (power supply system side) the furnace supply on until
the following requirements (relevant to safety) are met:
The ±15 V power supply is OK.
The cell temperature measurement channel is OK.
The cell temperature is <1280 °C (<1700 °C for the high temperature version).
The cooler temperature measurement channel is OK.
The cooler temperature is <60 °C.
The instrument was switched off to rectify an error in the cell temperature or cooler tempera-
ture measurement channel (resetting of sensor monitoring).
The SW switches the furnace power supply on.
If one of the above conditions is no longer met during operation, the monitoring system
switches the furnace power supply off and the SW notifies the user of the "responsible ele-
ment". The monitoring circuit and the final controlling element are galvanically separated.

4.7.9 Furnace power supply control

The 16-bit DAC is controlled from the processor board. It converts the digital value (0 ...
65535) into an analog voltage of 0... +10 V which is galvanically separated and filtered.
4.7.10 Furnace position control

Principle: The signal to open or close the furnace (1-bit) comes from the processor board via
power supply to the stepper motor driver board.
The furnace end positions are detected with a micro switch (open) and a light barrier
(closed). This information is sent to the processor board but is also used to control the step-
per motor
The supply voltage for the logic part is 5 V, for the stepper motor driver 24 V.
4.7.11 Line out

There is a socket which is either permanently connected or – as an option – can be
switched. In this case the power output can be switched on and off by a relay through soft-
ware.
4.7.12 General
The TGA/DSC 1 operates when all power supplies are OK (self-test). All power supplies are
designed that a line voltage failure of < 20 ms is bridged. The GND lines of the following
power supplies are metallically connected with one another and with the housing: +24 V,
+5.1 V, ±15 V and +10.5 V. The +12 V (balance TGA/DSC 1 module) power supplies is float-
ing. The heat losses of the linearly controlled power supplies are dissipated by an external
heat sink (lower internal instrument temperature less temperature drift). The peripheral con-
trol board is mounted directly above the power supply board and connected to the latter via
ST21. There are reserve connectors for the power supply of the sample changer (ST14), the
balance (ST15) and an additional option.

4.8 µProcessor board

In preparation

4.9 SmartSens terminal

In preparation

4.10 Analog board TGA/DSC 1

±5 V
PS 1 From power supply

board
±15V
-5V -15V
AGND AGND DGND
+5.1V
+5V +15V
Overtemp. Limit
Sample temp. -2.5V....+13.5V
sensor R-type A
KL1 + SAMP_TEMP
D
SAMP_TEMP-Error
KL8
LIMREF SYSREF
± 2.5 V +2.5 V
P2
Offset
FURN_TEMP-Error
T
A O
/
KL2 + FURN_TEMP F
D R
Furnace temp. O
Overtemp. Limit
sensor R-type -2.5V....+13.5V
M
Furnace P
CJ R
KL7 O
Board
C
E
P1 S
Offset +15V S
Supply Q
Q TEMP_SENSOR-Error
O
monitor
-15V R
+5V
KL6 Safety shut down B
-5V O
A
R
D
KL5 COOLER_TEMP
Limit +5V
0V
Cooling flange
temp. sensor COOL_TEMP-Error
Overtemp.
Sample
CJ KL4 CJ_TEMP
Board
Vref
+15V
-15V
PS 2 Power Supply
AGND
KL3 +5V

4.11 Thermocouple amplifier board

This board is required if a DTA or a DSC sensor is used. It does not hurt if it is installed but
only a SDTA sensor is installed.
The temperature signals are brought by one cable from the balance enclosure to the analog
board and the thermocouple amplifier board. The digitized signals are then transmitted from
the thermocouple amplifier board to the analog board, which provides the supply voltages
and controls the temperature reading.

4.12 Furnace power amplifier

4.12.1 Inputs
The line voltage is brought to the furnace power amplifier via the line module. The furnace
supply can be switched on and off by the control input (0 / 24 V). A further line (0...10 V) al-
lows to control the output voltage.
4.12.2 Output
The power output can be varied between 0 and 50 V up to a power of 400 W maximum
(600 W in the case of the high temperature version) to the heater.
4.12.3 Miscellaneous
24 V from the power supply board power the integrated fan. The fan runs when the amplifier
is in operation.

4.13 Furnace position detection

The furnace closed position is detected by a light barrier. The closed position can be ad-
justed with a set screw which is located on the crucible collecting plate and is accessible
through a hole in the cooling flange. A micro switch detects the furnace open position. It is
mounted to the furnace drive and the set screw is accessible from the right (below the bal-
ance). These two signals are used on the motor driver board and are brought to the proces-
sor board via the power supply board. The software monitors the two signals and an ERROR
message is generated if a fault is found.

4.14 Firmware (Versions and features)
Type Version Date Required Remarks

STARe SW
TGA/DSC 1 2.01 ≥ 9.10
TGA/DSC 1 2.02 ≥ 9.10
TGA/DSC 1 2.03 29-Nov-07 ≥ 9.10 Details see ESI-0717 in section11
TGA/DSC 1 2.04 15-Apr-08 ≥ 9.20 Details see ESI-0803A in section 11
4.15 Technical data

For technical data see in the operating manual section 11 (Technical Data) and in the
Log-Book.
All specifications apply to new instruments. If some of the specs can no longer be achieved
due to aging, exceptional expense might be necessary to attain the original specifications.



TGA/DSC 1 Error Messages / Trouble Shooting
CONTENTS PAGE
5 Error Messages / Trouble Shooting ................................................................ 5-3

5.1 Error Messages and Warnings .......................................................................... 5-3
5.1.1 Error Messages .................................................................................................... 5-3
5.1.2 Warnings .............................................................................................................. 5-6
5.1.3 Other Problems .................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.4 Suggested Measures............................................................................................ 5-7
5.2 Trouble shooting ................................................................................................ 5-9
5.2.1 General Hints........................................................................................................ 5-9
5.2.2 Trouble shooting flow diagram............................................................................ 5-10
5.2.3 Trouble shooting guide ....................................................................................... 5-14
5.3 Measurement with a module called berthA .................................................... 5-20
5.4 Service Software on the PC ............................................................................. 5-21
5.4.1 General............................................................................................................... 5-21
5.4.2 Download the ‘TAService Tool’........................................................................... 5-21
5.4.3 TAServiceTool login............................................................................................ 5-22
5.4.4 Test software Overview ...................................................................................... 5-23
5.4.5 Test software description.................................................................................... 5-24
5.5 Service Mode on the SmartSens Terminal ..................................................... 5-77
5.5.1 Entering the service mode .................................................................................. 5-77
5.5.2 Robot functions................................................................................................... 5-78
5.5.3 Module setup ...................................................................................................... 5-80
5.5.4 Download resources ........................................................................................... 5-81
5.5.5 Reset TCP/IP...................................................................................................... 5-81
5.5.6 Boot .................................................................................................................... 5-81
5.5.7 Exit...................................................................................................................... 5-81
5.6 Loading the firmware ....................................................................................... 5-82
5.6.1 Download the required firmware......................................................................... 5-82
5.6.2 Installation (Uploading) of the Firmware onto the TA module ............................. 5-82
5.7 Reloading the balance configuration.............................................................. 5-87

Error Messages / Trouble Shooting TGA/DSC 1

5 Error Messages / Trouble Shooting

5.1 Error Messages and Warnings
5.1.1 Error Messages
The error number appears on the SmartSens Terminal. The keys are blocked, no further
command is executable and the instrument must be switched off.
Note: One and two digit error codes are main error codes, whereas 4 digit error codes
are sub-error codes which enables the Service Engineer to encircle the malfunction
even more efficient.
Error Cause Suggested

measures
4 Temperature measuring channel or sensor failure was detected (ERROR 23, 25, 38 or 39) 1, 2
and the safety circuit has switched off the furnace power supply
5 Primary line voltage is too low or the voltage selector is set wrong 3
6 The last calibration of the robot was out of tolerance 24
6001 Calibration step 1 plate -> gripper was out of tolerance 24
6002 Calibration step 2 gripper -> plate level was out of tolerance 24
6003 Calibration step 3 gripper -> sensor level was out of tolerance 24
6004 Calibration step 4 gripper -> pan was out of tolerance 24
6005 Calibration step 5 pan bottom -> light barrier was out of tolerance 24
6006 Calibration step 6 pan top -> light barrier was out of tolerance 24
6007 Calibration step 7 pan recognition light barrier not working pan recognition light barrier was 24
out of tolerance
6008 Calibration step 8 pan thickness was out of tolerance 24
7 SW not executable on this type of module 4, 5
8 GC10 and GC20 only: Gas controller 1 is required by experiment but is not connected (DIN 6
plug not detected)
20 The TGA/DSC 1 furnace does not open or close within the maximum admissible time.. 7, 8
21 Furnace opening/closing mechanism: opened and closed at the same time detected 8
22 Cell temperature outside specifications (SW). 2
The cell temperature was greater than 1200 °C (>1650 °C for HT)


measures
23 Cell temperature measuring channel failed or over temperature detected (HW) 2, 13
2301 Cell temperature ADC timeout. ADC cannot convert 10, 12, 13, 14
2302 Cell temperature voltage signal out of allowed comparator window at the input of the ADC on 2, 13
the analog board.
2303 Power supply voltages on the analog board failed ±15 V or 5 V 10, 12, 13
2304 Cell temperature sensor failed 2, 10, 12, 13
The thermocouple has a short circuit or a break.. Fault in the analog electronics.
The furnace temperature was greater than 1200 °C (1600 °C HT) due to a software fault.
24 Cooler temperature out of range (SW). 9
25 Cooler temperature measuring channel failed or over temperature detected (HW). 9, 13
2501 Cooler temperature ADC timeout. ADC cannot convert. 10, 12, 13, 14
2502 Cooler temperature voltage signal out of allowed comparator window at the input of the ADC 9, 13
on the analog board.
26 Cooler temperature measuring failed: calibration values out of range 11
27 Electronic power supply (some voltage failed) 10
2701 Power supply voltage failed: +15 V 10
2702 Power supply voltage failed: +24 V 10
2703 Power supply voltage failed: balance voltage (+12 V) (TGA/DSC 1 only) 10
29 Self calibration of ADC DSC or ADC FURN_TEMP failed -> ADC's do not initialize for cali- 13
bration or do not get ready after calibration.
30 Module identification (TAPID) does not exist 15
31 RAM test failed: not writable / readable 1, 14
32 FLASH test failed: stored and calculated checksum are different 1, 14


measures
34 FRAM test failed: not writable / readable or stored and calculated checksum are different 1, 14
3415 Sample robot parameter write error 4, 14
3416 LCD parameter write error 4, 14
3417 Structure convert parameter error (Version handling) 4, 14
3418 TAPID write error 4, 14
3419 SW version parameter write error 4, 14
3421 Tapid read error 4, 14
3430 NV clear data error 4, 14
38 Sample temperature thermocouple or measuring channel failed (TGA only) 16
3801 Sample temperature ADC timeout, can not convert (TGA only) 10, 12, 13, 14
3802 Sample temperature signal out of range. Signal voltage outside of allowed window at the 16, 13
ADC input on the analog board (TGA only, at boot up)
39 DTA sensor or DTA measuring channel failed (TGA only) 17
3901 DTA temperature ADC timeout, can not convert (TGA only) 10, 12, 13, 14
3902 DTA temperature signal out of range. Signal voltage outside of allowed window at the ADC 17, 13
input on the TC board (TGA only)
40 Sample temperature out of range (SW window) (TGA only, during measurement) 16, 13
42 Cold junction temperature (sample) out of range (SW) (TGA only) 23
43 Cold junction sensor or measuring channel failed (HW) (TGA only) 23
4301 Cold junction temperature ADC timeout (TGA only) 23
50 Sample robot position sensor or axis drive failed. 24
5001 Lifter did not reach its reference 24
5002 Could not move the lifter out of reference 24
5003 Could not move the lifter to prick level 24
5004 Could not move the lifter to plate level 24
5005 Could not move the lifter Light barrier level 24
5006 Could not move the lifter to Sensor level (Pan) 24
5007 Could not move the lifter to Sensor level (Lid) 24
5008 Could not move the plate to reference 24
5009 Could not move the plate to specific pan number 24
5010 Could not open gripper 24
5011 Could not open gripper (limited) 24
5012 Could not close gripper 24
5013 Could not move the gripper to center position 24
5014 Could not move the gripper to reference position 24
5015 Could not move the lifter to init position 24
5016 Could not move the lifter to parking position 24
5017 Could not move the lifter out of parking position 24


measures
51 Gas controller flow sensor error 6, 12, 20
53 Problems in communication with balance 21
56 Problems in communication with balance (no response from balance) 19, 21
57 Zero force value could not be found 22
128 Internal software error detected Contact the Hot-
999 line
5.1.2 Warnings
TGA/DSC 1 warnings are described in the TGA/DSC 1 Operating manual section 10.
5.1.3 Other Problems

Problem Possible cause(s) Suggested mea-
sures
Total calibration fails Actual adjustment parameters are too bad for automatic 19
readjusting
Difference between sample tem- Temperature adjustment failed (repeat total adjustment)
perature and furnace tempera-
ture exceeds 10 °C
No communication with the PC IP address not correct (PC or module)
can be established Ethernet cable defective or wrong type ( standard / crossover)
Wrong port on the PC’s software selected (wireless, etc)
Port set for serial connection instead of TCP/IP
Windows problems (reboot PC)
Communication board defective
Processor board defective

5.1.4 Suggested Measures

Note:
The suggested measures might be incomplete for the specific problem e.g. a defective cable
could be the reason for misbehavior in nearly every case, even when it is not explicitly men-
tioned here.
1. Reset module: Switch power off for >5 sec.

2. Check and repair temperature measurement channels
a) Run the service software and check the temperatures, as described in the service
software description (includes a short heating experiment)
b) When measuring, check also for the displayed direct ADC values are slightly changing
(by about +/-10 digits)
c) If a temperature signal is completely stable or extremely noisy, probably the AD con-
verter on the analog board is defective
d) Check for short circuits on the thermocouple wires
e) Check connectors on the affected printed circuit boards
f) Make sure, that after analog board adjustment, the testing short circuits are removed
and the thermocouples are connected again. Make sure, that JP6 on the analog board
is back in its position
g) In rare cases, performance of measure 10 would help
3. Check hardware primary voltage settings (including fuses), exchange hardware if prob-
lem remains
4. HW and SW on the module do not correspond. Perform firmware update with the correct
version
5. Check contents of FRAM (with TAServiceTool)
6. Check module installation on PC for correct entered gas controller option. Connect gas
controller. Replace gas controller, if error remains
7. Make sure that the furnace drive shafts can move easily (no dirt, sticky stuff, etc)
a) Check furnace drive motor
b) Check stepper motor control board and connections
8. Check furnace position PCB (closed)
a) Check end switch (open) and cables
9. Check cooler temperature (see also hints in 2)
a) Run service software item cooler temperature.
b) Look for short circuits in the Pt100 lines wires
c) Check connectors on the affected printed circuit boards
10. Supply voltages failure (line module or power supply):
a) Check fuses
b) Check voltages
11. Recalibrate the instrument
12. Check affected cables (including ribbon cables)
13. Replace analog board
14. Replace processor board
15. Reprogram ID on the module using the SmartSens Terminal or the TAServiceTool

16. Check sample temperature (see also hints in 2)

a) Run service software item sample temperature
b) Check for broken thermo couple wires to the sample holder
c) Check connections from the sensor to the counter part in the balance
d) Check connectors on the affected printed circuit boards
17. Check DTA temperature (see also hints in 2)
a) Run service software item DTA temperature
b) Check for broken thermo couple wires to the sample holder
c) Check connections from the sensor to the counter part in the balance
d) Check connectors on the affected printed circuit boards
18. Check furnace temperature (see also hints in 2)
a) Run service software item furnace temperature.
b) Look for short circuits on the thermo couple wires
c) Check connectors on the affected printed circuit boards
19. Check if the sensor touches somewhere so that the balance can not start up correctly
20. Replace peripheral control board
21. Check balance
a) Check if balance starts up (put weights on, removes them, etc)
b) Check cables and balance supply voltage
c) Run Lars to check balance configuration
d) Replace balance electronics
e) Replace balance
22. Check if
a) The balance can move freely.
b) The weights do not touch
23. The cold junction board is located in the balance housing.
a) Check all connections
b) Run the test software with the TAService Tool (Item sample temperature).
c) Check with TGA/DSC 1 test plug
d) Replace Analog board
24. Perform electronic robot calibration (Executed form the SmartSens Terminal). Some me-
chanical adjustments could be necessary

5.2 Trouble shooting

5.2.1 General Hints
Before you start any troubleshooting you have to analyze the complete situation. Problems
can come from samples, sample preparation, environment, handling error and other un-
known influences. Please get from the customer all information about the problem, e. g.
since when the problem exists, if it is a well known application or a new type, if he has
changed something before this problem turned up (moved the instrument, changed gas sup-
ply, changed gas regulators, opened a new set of crucibles, done a new instrument calibra-
tion etc.), if there was anything changed in the environment (new air-condition, new electrical
lines etc.).
Use the following flow diagram and its descriptions to evaluate the problem step by step.
This trouble shooting guide is made to find out special problems like noise / drift / artifacts.
Only if you cannot find the problem with help of this trouble shooting guide, please contact
TAFPS.Help@mt.com. All results of your prior measurements are required (please use ex-
ported curves to send with your requirements; as a result we have much better possibilities
for evaluation with them).

5.2.2 Trouble shooting flow diagram
START
Is an error message
present ?
Go to the
error number list
yes
and repair this
error first
no
Is a mechanical or
electrical problem
present ?
Repair the
mechanical or
yes
electrical problem
first
no
next page
2

Is the problem
on the balance signal?
Disconnect all
yes devices and
furnace power
no
Run measurement 1
(iso with filter)
Check environment
not OK
and installation
OK
Run measurement 2
(iso without filter)
OK
not OK
Reconnect the gas Make sure that the

supply sensor does not touch
(if available) the furnace
Run measurement 3
not OK Repair or replace balance
OK
Replace sample holder

next page next page
3 4

Disconnect all
devices and
furnace power
Run measurement 1
(iso with filter)
Check environment
not OK
and installation
OK
Run measurement 2
OK
not OK
Reconnect the gas Check analog

supply electronic board,
(if available) connecting cables
and temperature
sensors
Run measurement 3
OK not OK
next page
4

Run measurement 4
(iso with filter)
replace or repair
not OK Check Gas supply
Gas supply
OK
Reconnect the
cooling deivice
Run measurement 5
(iso with filter)
Check cooling replace or repair

not OK
device cooling device
OK
Reconnect the
Furnace power
Run measurement 6
(dyn. with filter)
Check heating Repair or replace

element, furnace heating element,
power amplifier, furnace power
not OK
temperature amplifier, temp.
sensor, sensor, analog
OK
analog board board
Run measurement 7
(dyn. without filter)
not OK
OK
Problem fixed

5.2.3 Trouble shooting guide
Flow diagram sheet 1
START Before you start please read first “5.2.1 General Hints”
Is an error message Error messages are displayed on the Instruments display and also in
present ? the STARe software.
Go to the
error number list
and repair this Use “5.1 Error messages” to see, which problem occurs.
error first
Is a mechanical or
electrical problem No display, blocked furnace drive, broken sample holder etc.
present ?
Repair the Replace all defective parts.

mechanical or
electrical problem
Repair electrical problems (mains supply, fuses, connectors etc.).
first Check and correct system configuration, if it is required.

If the problem is on the balance signal, go to the next step; if it’s an-
Is the problem
on the balance signal? other problem go to sheet 3.
Disconnect all external devices

Disconnect all
devices and
• Disconnect all gas flows (purge, protective, reactive gas)
furnace power • Remove all crucibles
• Disconnect the cooling option (Cryostat)
• Disconnect the furnace power cable (furnace will not heat)
• Create a new module (measurements with this module are fil-
tered) (the reason for the new module is, that you should make
the measurements with the default adjustment parameters)
• Method: Isothermal 25 °C, 20 min

Run measurement 1
(iso with filter)
• A forced start is required (press OK until the STARe software indi-
cates “Measurement”, because the system cannot reach the start
temperature.
• Evaluate the balance signal for noise, artifacts etc.
Example: In preparation
If the above measurement is OK, reconnect the gas supply and go to

Reconnect the gas sheet 4.
supply
Check environment
If the above measurement is not OK, go to the next step.
and installation
With a module called “berthA”, the automatic signal smoothing func-

Run measurement 2
tion is disabled and you get additional possibilities to save additional
(iso without filter) temperature curves (software option “online evaluations” required Î
Service Hardlock). Use the same method as in measurement 1.
Important: Evaluate noise and artifact problems on the balance sig-
nal. Noise could also be a result of internal vibration, maybe you
have to disconnect the furnace power amplifier from the power sup-
ply board to evaluate noise influences from furnace power amplifier
fan.

Make sure that the Open the furnace from the back so that you can see inside. Make
sensor does not touch sure the sensor doesn’t touch anywhere. Close the furnace again
the furnace
before starting the measurement.
Run measurement 3 Repetition of measurement 2 and its evaluations.

(iso without filter) Example: In preparation
If the problem still exist, repair the balance with help of a trained
Repair or replace balance microbalance-engineer or replace the complete balance assembly
according to the description in section 7 of this manual.
Replace sample holder

If the measurement does not show the problem replace the sample
holder and go directly to sheet 4.

Disconnect all external devices

Disconnect all
devices and • Disconnect all gas flows (purge, protective, reactive gas)
furnace power • Remove all crucibles
• Disconnect the cooling option (Cryostat)
• Disconnect the furnace power cable (furnace will not heat)
• Create a new module (measurements with this module are fil-
tered) (the reason for the new module is, that you should make
the measurements with the default adjustment parameters)
• Method: Isothermal 25 °C, 20 min

Run measurement 1 • A forced start is required (press OK until the STARe software indi-
(iso with filter)
cates “Measurement”, because the system cannot reach the start
temperature.
• Evaluate the SDTA and the cell temperature signal for noise, arti-
facts etc.
Check environment
If the problem still persist, check installation environment for vibration
and installation and other influencies
With a module called “berthA”, the automatic signal smoothing func-

Run measurement 2
tion is disabled and you get additional possibilities to save additional
temperature curves (software option “online evaluations” required Î
Service Hardlock). Use the same method as in measurement 1.
Important: Evaluate noise and artifact problems on the SDTA and
cell temperature signal.
Check analog
Check the analog board, cables and sensors. Short-circuit the analog
electronic board, board inputs for checking the analog board. Touch the cable during
connecting cables measurements to check the cables. Etc.
and temperature
sensors
Run measurement 3
Repeat measurement 2
Reconnect the gas supply and go to sheet 4, if the measurement was

Reconnect the gas
supply
OK.

The same module and method are used as for Measurement 1.

Run measurement 4
(iso with filter)
Check the following on the Gas system:

Check Gas supply • Flow stability (pressure reducing valve etc.).
• Special gas properties (conduction etc.).
• Other influences from the gas used or gas installation
The supplied gases must be dry and clean. Using a two stage pres-
replace or repair
Gas supply sure reducing valve is strongly recommended.
Reconnect the cooling device to check, if the problem is influenced

Reconnect the
cooling deivice
from the cooling device (instability of temperature etc.).
The same module and method are used as for Measurement 1.

Run measurement 5
(iso with filter)
Check the installed cooling device for proper functioning.

Check cooling
device
The function of the cryostat and LN2 cooling system must be accord-
ing to the specifications.
Repair the located defect or replace the cooling device by a working

replace or repair
cooling device
one
If the system works now OK in isothermal measurement (without

Reconnect the heating), the furnace power supply can be reconnected.
Furnace power
Method: dynamic 25 °C to 300 °C, 10 K/min (or another equivalent

Run measurement 6
(dyn. with filter)
temperature range, dependent on the problematic temperature).
Evaluate the SDTA signal for noise, artifacts etc.
Check heating
Dependent on the result of measurement 6, the system should be
element, furnace checked and repaired. Possible reasons can be in the complete heat-
power amplifier, ing control circuit from the temperature sensor through the measuring
temperature
sensor, and control circuits to the end of the chain, the furnace heater itself.
analog board Please check the heater resistance as well (6.25 ±0.6 Ω for 1100 °C
furnace, 1.2 ±0.1 Ω for 1600 °C furnace).

Repair or replace Replace the defective parts and reassemble the instrument carefully.
heating element,
furnace power
amplifier, temp.
sensor, analog
board
Run measurement 7
Connect the system with a berthA module to the STARe Software.
(dyn. without filter) Method: dynamic 25 °C to 300 °C, 10 K/min (or another equivalent
temperature range, dependent on the problematic temperature).
Evaluate the SDTA signal for noise, artifacts etc.
Do the Service Final check and fill out the Logbook.

Problem fixed

5.3 Measurement with a module called berthA

• Create a new module and store it with the name: berthA xxx. This module is using the
default calibration parameters. If you like to have the system calibrated, you can store the
calibrated module with the new name berthA xxx.
• Run an experiment. At the end also the additional curves are saved automatically (this was
not the case in earlier SW versions).
• Go to the evaluation window and load the sample weight, heat flow curve as well as the
furnace temperature curve (Set first in Evaluation Î File Î Open curve Î Filter Î
Measured curves only (= Off) if the measurement was stopped before its end)
• Make the first derivative of the furnace temperature (Evaluation Î Math Î first deriva-
tive) and compare this curve with the DSC curve.
• If there is a correlation then the problem is probably from the power supply (from the
power supply module, furnace power amplifier or from the power line itself).
1. knoc king a t the module

2. high er air curre nt
3. furnace open/close
4. knocking at the module
TGA Test berthA, 20.04.2000 14:58:10
5 TGA Test berthA, 174.5960 mg
mg
Weight signal
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 min
°C
TGA Test berthA, 20.04.2000 14:59:15

TGA Test berthA, 174.5960 mg
Furnace temperature
1. 2. 3. 4.
500
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 min
\TGA Test berthA

50 TGA Test berthA, 174.5960 mg
°Cmin^-1
1. Deriv ate of the fur nace temperatur e
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 min

5.4 Service Software on the PC

5.4.1 General
The TAServiceTool is downloadable from our extranet www.mtana.com. It helps the service
engineer to check the proper function of the instrument and easily find causes of malfunction
and rapidly repair the module.
To work with this software, the processor and its memory infrastructure on the controller
board must operate correctly. The power supply voltages +5 V and +3.3 V must have correct
values to allow the CPU to boot up properly and to allow the service engineer to enter the
service-operating mode.
Disconnect the module in the STARe software, to get the communication path free for
the TAServiceTool.
5.4.2 Download the ‘TAService Tool’

• On the Extranet (www.mtanainfo.com), the TAService Tool must be downloaded first.
• Install the TAService Tool on your PC.
• Make sure that the file “XportSetup.cfg” is present in the same directory as the “TASer-
viceTool.exe”. It contains important configuration parameters.

5.4.3 TAServiceTool login

On the computer:
• Start-up the TAServiceTool
• If not yet done, choose the IP-Address of the module:
- Go to Settings / Communication
- Select TCP/IP and choose the Hostname (IP-Address of the module)
- Leave port on 10001
- Press OK to leave
• Go to Actions/Connect
• You should get a message that the connection is OK, likewise as the following:
TCP/IP connection to host 172.21.209.83 port 10001 OK.
• Click on ENTER SERVICE
• The module boots automatically.
You now have 60 seconds to boot the instrument via the SmartSens Terminal or the boot
button on the processor board, if it does not boot.
On the SmartSens Terminal (if necessary):

• Press the SETUP hard key
• Press the SERVICE soft key
• Enter the 4-digit password for service “2121”
• Touch the BOOT soft key
• You get the following information: ‘The system is now booting. Please wait.’
• After about 30 seconds you get the message ‘Terminal Service mode is now running.’
On the TAServiceTool you get the following message:

• SERVICE LOGIN
ENTER PASSWORD:
• Enter the 4-digit password for service “2121”
• Now you can perform all service relevant functions.
To get a log file of all operations and to collect the measuring values delivered by the instru-
ment in all the tests, you can save the whole content of the service window by selecting File /
Save As.
To locate these files always in the same folder and to have a significant name for them, we
recommend choosing the log directory in the STAReSW directory on the hard disk of the
STARe computer. Use incrementing numbers in the file name in order not to overwrite the
existing log files (e.g. Service003.log)
Make all tests to check the complete module, including the statistic tests, and at the end,
save the file as described. Some sections (statistics) in this file can be processed in an excel
sheet to show the quality of the signal processing and conversion of the different ADC chan-
nels.

5.4.4 Test software Overview
Accessible functions with service password 2121
0: BACK 0: BACK 0: BACK

1: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 1: EDIT OPTIONS 1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: SERVICE SOFTWARE 2: EDIT BAUDRATE 2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: EDIT PRIMARY VOLTAGE 3: DISPLAY TAPID
4: EDIT FURNACE PARAMETER 4: DISPLAY HARDWARE REVISIONS
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE 5: DISPLAY SOFTWARE VERSIONS
6: SEL. SAMPLE HOLDER TYPE 6: DISPLAY OS POST MORTEM INFO
7: EDIT BALANCE FILTER PAR.
8: EDIT TA-MODULE SERIAL NR.
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS 0: BACK
A: EDIT TA-MODULE ID 1: NVRAM SETTINGS MENU
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE 0: BACK
C: EDIT SERVICE DATE 1: LIST DEVICES (IIC)
D: EDIT FURNACE HOLD 2: LIST FAT
TEMPERATURE TIMEOUT 0: BACK
3: READ DATA
1: POWER SUPPLY
6: EXPORT FILE
2: NVRAM
8: DELETE FILE
3: XP TERMINAL
9: COMPACT NVDATA
4: ADC STATISTICS
a: RESTORE FILE CONSISTENCY
0: BACK
1:INFORMATION 0: BACK
2: NON-VOLATILE SETTINGS 1: MEASURE FURNACE TEMP
3: SYSTEM 2: CONTROL FURNACE POWER
4: FURNACE 3: MOVE FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
0: BACK
1: MEASURE COOLER TEMP
0: BACK
1: LINE RELAY
2: GAS BOX
3: SYNC
0: BACK
1: MEASURE SAMPLE TEMP
2: MEASURE DTA TEMP
3: SAMPLE ROBOT PARAMETERS

5.4.5 Test software description
SERVICE LOGIN
ENTER PASSWORD:XXXX
Pressing one of the number keys (other then 0) gets you to the next layer in the menu
structure
****************************************************
SERVICE STARTUP MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
2: SERVICE SOFTWARE
********************************************************************************************************
Pressing key 0 gets you always one layer back in the menu structure
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
2: NON-VOLATILE SETTINGS
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: SERVICE SOFTWARE
********************************************************************************************************
Do not use the ENTER key of the numeric key block, when you have to press the
ENTER key.
Please use the ENTER key of the main keyboard block

This menu allows settings of the basic configuration of the module with its options and ac-
cessories.
Pressing key 1 gets you to the layer that allows you to select and edit some important in-
strument parameters.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: SERVICE SOFTWARE
Pressing key 1 to EDIT OPTIONS offers the selection between different furnace power
supplies:
****************************************************
STARTUP SERVICE MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
3: EDIT PRIMARY VOLTAGE
4: EDIT FURNACE PAR.
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
6: SELECT SAMPLE HOLDER TYPE
7. EDIT BALANCE FILTER PARAMETRS
8: EDIT TA- MODULE SERIAL NR.
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
A: EDIT TA-MODULE ID
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
C: EDIT SERVICE DATE
D: EDIT FURNACE HOLD TEMPERATURE TIMEOUT
Usually the SPACE-Key can be used to select the default value (if there is one). After press-
ing the ENTER-Key one can choose the correct value from a menu:
SELECT FURNACE :
1: TGA Small
2: TGA Large
3: TGA HT
Select: 1

Next is the selection of the correct furnace power supply type
SELECT FURNACE SUPPLY: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
SELECT FURNACE SUPPLY :

1: 400 W
2: 600 W
Select: 1
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 to EDIT BAUDRATE allows the selection of the baud rate on the serial
communication port between the module and the Ethernet connection board. Pressing the
space key sets the default value (115200), Pressing the enter key gives the choice below.
Type 4 for 115200.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN BAUDRATE: ENTER: PUT IN / SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
Set Baudrate to Comp.:

1: Baudrate 9600
2: Baudrate 19200
3: Baudrate 38400
4: Baudrate 115200(*)
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 to EDIT PRIMARY VOLTAGE allows the selection of the primary supply
voltage of the module, 230V / 50Hz or 115V / 60Hz.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN PRIM. VOLT. FREQ.: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
SELECT Prim Volt Freq:

1: Prim. Voltage Freq. 50Hz (*)
2: Prim. Voltage Freq. 60Hz
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 4 to EDIT FURNACE PAR. allows editing the PID parameters of the fur-
nace control and the reserved control Parameters CTRL1,2,3.
ATTENTION!!! These parameters depend on the options the module works with
(cooler, furnace type, furnace power supply etc.) Normally, there is no need to change
these parameters. However, if you are an advanced user and you know exactly what
to key in, then you may change the values.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN PID CONSTANTS: ENTER: PUT IN / SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
If you choose to type in the values, type in P, confirm with enter and so
on:
PUT IN P: xxx ENTER
PUT IN I: xxx ENTER
PUT IN D: xxx ENTER

Now you are asked to enter the configuration parameters (also called reserved
parameters):
PUT IN CONFIG PAR.: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
If you choose the default values, all three parameters are set to 0
If you choose to type in the values, type in P1, confirm with enter and so
on:
RESERVED PARAM P1: ±xxxx ENTER
The configuration parameters are determined during the final testing after production
and depend on the furnace – sensor combination. Do not change these values. Choo-
sing the default values sets them to 0 which is only good for SDTA sensors. The val-
ues can be found in the log book.
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 5 to EDIT TEMP RANGE allows editing the temperature range of the fur-
nace
The upper and lower operating temperature limits are defined by the furnace construction,
the sample holder, and the furnace power supply working in the module.
Normally, there is no need to change this parameters. If need drives you to key in other val-
ues than default, please contact TAFPS-Help beforehand.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN TEMPERATURE RANGE: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY:

DEFAULT
PUT IN MIN TMP:-xxx

Enter the correct value and press the ENTER key
PUT IN MAX TMP:xxx

Enter the correct value and press the ENTER key
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 6 to SELECT SAMPLE HOLDER TYPE allows selecting the sample
holder. For the small furnace there is just one possibility (SDTA). For the large furnace there
are several options.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN TGA SAMPLE HOLDER: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
Set TGA SAMPLE CARRIER:

1: SF SDTA FRS2
2: LF SDTA FRS2
3: HT SDTA FRS2
4: LF DTA FRS2
5: HT DTA FRS2
6: LF DSC HSS2
7: HT DSC HSS2
Select: 1
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 7 to EDIT BALANCE FILTER PARAMETRS allows to set two Balance
filter parameters. These are short codes for the “balance weighing parameters” according to
the balance manuals. The default values are:
Balance filter exp. : 1
Balance filter stby. : 0
At present there is no known need or use for a different setting.
For advanced users: See section 5.4 in the AX/MX/UMX operating instructions for more de-
tails. It is possible to type in a 3 digit code for both parameters.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
Put in balance filter exp. :: Enter: Put in/Space-key: default

Put in balance filter stby. :: Enter: Put in/Space-key: default
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 8 to EDIT TA-Module SERIAL NR allows editing the serial number of the
module
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN TA-Module SER. NR.:: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY:

DEFAULT
PUT IN TA-Module SER. NR.: xxxxxxxxx and press the ENTER

key
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 9 to EDIT IP-ADDRESS allows editing the IP-Address of the module.
Attention, this parameter is an information only and does not set the address on the
Ethernet communication board!
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT first 3 digits :

XXX
PUT second 3 digits : YYY
PUT third 3 digits : ZZZ
PUT fourth 3 digits : VVV
saved IP-Address:
XXX.YYY.ZZZ.VVV
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key A to EDIT TA-MODULE ID allows editing the identification number of the
module
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN MODULE ID NR.: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY:

DEFAULT
PUT IN MODULE ID NR. 123 and press the ENTER key
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key B to EDIT GASBOX TYPE allows editing the gas controller which is hooked
up to the module. This is only applicable to the “old” gas controllers of the type GC10
and GC20. If a new gas controller (GC100 or GC200) is hooked up, the message “no
gas box connected” is shown. The new gas controllers are configured automatically
during boot up of the module. There is no configuration necessary.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
CHOOSE A GASBOX TYPE: ENTER: PUT IN/SPACE-KEY:

DEFAULT
SELECT Gasbox type:

1: GASBOX GC10
2: GASBOX GC20
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key C to EDIT SERVICE DATE allows editing the date at which the service logo
appears on the display of the XP-Terminal.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
You are then asked to put in the date in the following order:
Year
Month
Day
The confirmation is the following:
saved service date:

2007/06/25
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key D to EDIT FURNACE HOLD TEMPERATURE TIMEOUT allows edit-

ing this parameter. The standard value is 60 minutes for the TGA/DSC 1.
If the furnace temperature is not reached within this time, Warning 14 is displayed.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: EDIT OPTIONS
2: EDIT BAUDRATE
5: EDIT TEMP RANGE
9: EDIT IP-ADDRESS
B: EDIT GASBOX TYPE
PUT IN FURNACE HOLD TEMP. TIMEOUT [MIN] ::

ENTER: PUT IN / SPACE-KEY: DEFAULT
********************************************************************************************************

2: SERVICE SOFTWARE
Pressing key 2 gets you to the layer that allows you to enter the SERVICE SOFTWARE to
check the functions and properties of the module.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: SERVICE SOFTWARE
Press key 1 to enter the information menu
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
The INFORMATION layer gives an overview of the module hardware and software in the
SERVICETEST INFO MENU
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 1 gives a SYSTEM OVERVIEW with TAPID, BOARD REVISION, SW

VERSION and NVRAM CONFIGURATION
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
4: DISPLAY HW REVISIONS
5: DISPLAY SW VERSIONS
6: DISP OS POST MORTEM INFO
TAPID
type: TGA 1(00784)
ID : 00000243
BOARD REVISION
controller : 3
display : 1
analog : 2
dta : 1
peripheral : 1
power supply : 1
sample robot : 1
SW VERSION
Module SW: V1.20d
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 gives a CONFIGURATION OVERVIEW with Baud rates, PID values
etc.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
NVRAM CONFIGURATION
Baudrate to PC : 115200
Prim.Voltage Hz : 50
Furnace Supply : 400 W
PID Control P : 25
PID Control I : 2500
PID Control D : 600
Min.Temperature : -50
Max.Temperature : 1200
Furnace ctrl p1 : 0
Furnace ctrl p2 : 0
Furnace ctrl p3 : 0
TGA Sample Holder Type : LF SDTA FRS2
Gasbox Type : GC20
TA-Module Serial Nr. : 1111111111
IP-Adress : 172.016.100.123
Service Date
: 2007/06/25
The furnace control parameters are 0 for SDTA-sensors only leave the values as they
are (factory installed)!
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 (DISPLAY TAPID) displays the module type with its (code number) and
the selected identification number for the instrument.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
TAPID
type: TGA 1(00784)
ID : 00000243
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 4 (DISPLAY HW REVISIONS) displays the revision number of the boards
in the module. Revision 0 on the DTA and the sample changer boards means that these
boards are not in the module. Revision 255 on the option control board means the same.
Resistors for all hardware without an onboard FRAM determine the revision of the boards.
New generation boards with FRAM have their revision programmed directly on silicon.
Boards without configured revision have a default of 65535.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
BOARD REVISION
controller : 3
display : 1
analog : 2
dta : 1
peripheral : 1
power supply : 1
sample changer : 1
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 5 (DISPLAY SW VERSIONS) displays the version of the software installed
in the FLASH of the controller board, running the instrument.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
SW VERSION
Module SW: V2_00
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 6 (DISP OS POST MORTEM INFO) displays information on the causes
that led the module to a malfunction in the operating system. Error messages that occurred
are displayed and help to isolate the problem and get the instrument to run again correctly.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
OS post mortem info

00: Assertion failed: this->IsInitialized()
(C:\ShirKhan\driver\TmaDrv.cpp, line 883), PID is 2Ah
01: CPU Trap: undef.instr, next op. at 2D202D30h, PID is 2Ah
02: RT exception: sig 00000002h, arg 00000002h, PID is 2Ah
The messages give information where in the program code the problem started, and can
only be interpreted by engineers in the R&D department. Please communicate the messages
to this department to get the necessary help.
If no problems ever happened in the operating system, the message will be:
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2: CONFIG OVERVIEW
3: DISPLAY TAPID
OS post mortem info

No entries
********************************************************************************************************

NON VOLATILE SETTINGS
From the Service test menu the NON-VOLATILE SETTINGS-menu can be entered.
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
The NON VOLATILE SETTINGS layer gives information on the contents of the FRAMs on
the controller and on the TMA board, and allows getting a matching of the contents of the
FRAMS.
****************************************************
FACTORY NVRAM SETTINGS
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: NVRAM SETTINGS MENU
********************************************************************************************************
Pressing key 1 (NVRAM SETTINGS MENU) gives an overview of the functions in this
menu
****************************************************
SERVICETEST NVRAM MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: LIST DEVICES (IIC)
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 1 (LIST DEVICES (IIC)) lists the devices (the boards with an FRAM mem-
ory) on the IIC bus.
The board with address 0x7 is the controller board
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
Devices:
FAT 0: no device
FAT 1: no device
FAT 2: no device
FAT 3: no device
FAT 4: no device
FAT 5: no device
FAT 6: no device
FAT 7: address: 0x7, HWIF_IIC, board type: 0x07
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 (LIST FAT) lists the addresses where the FAT (File Allocation Table) posi-
tions the files in the FRAM with start address and size. If there is more than one device pre-
sent, the desired one can be selected. Otherwise the information is displayed straight away.
The available devices are shown with their address (eg 7)
Also the size of the used memory is listed.
The size of the same type of files on each board must be identical. Their position may be
different.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
Select Device: 1,6,7
(if
more than one present)
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3
FAT data:
magic word : FAT Magic Word
board type : 0x07
File 0:, TapId, start: 0x02a8, size: 0x0008
File 1:, SystemInfo , start: 0x0368, size: 0x00cc
File 2:, BoardSettings07 , start: 0x0438, size: 0x000c
File 3:, SystemConfiguration , start: 0x0448, size: 0x00c8
Memory data:
used FAT memory: 680
used file memory: 440(3416)
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 (READ DATA) lists the data in the FRAM where the configuration informa-
tion is stored. If there is more than one device present, the desired one can be selected.
Otherwise the information is displayed straight away..
The available devices are shown with their address (, 7)
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3
Read NVDATA ...

done
0000: 46 41 54 20 4d 61 67 69 63 20 57 6f 72 64 00 00
0010: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0020: 07 00 00 00 54 61 70 49 64 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0030: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0040: 00 00 00 00 a8 02 00 00 08 00 00 00 53 79 73 74
0050: 65 6d 49 6e 66 6f 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0060: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 68 03 00 00
0070: cc 00 00 00 42 6f 61 72 64 53 65 74 74 69 6e 67
0080: 73 30 37 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0090: 00 00 00 00 38 04 00 00 0c 00 00 00 53 79 73 74
00a0: 65 6d 43 6f 6e 66 69 67 75 72 61 74 69 6f 6e 00
00b0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 48 04 00 00
00c0: c8 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00d0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00e0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
00f0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
. . . . .
02a0: 00 00 00 00 a5 16 00 00 f3 00 00 00 10 03 00 00
02b0: 06 01 00 00 56 31 2e 32 30 62 00 00 64 00 00 00

02c0: 88 13 00 00 90 01 00 00 38 ff ee 02 01 00 02 00
02d0: 04 00 01 00 05 00 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
02e0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
02f0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 05 00 00 00
0300: ee 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0310: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0320: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0330: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0340: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 33
0350: 34 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0360: 00 00 00 00 cd 06 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0370: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
. . . . .
0430: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 00
0440: 09 00 00 00 0c 00 00 00 56 31 2e 32 30 64 00 00
0450: 19 00 00 00 c4 09 00 00 58 02 00 00 ce ff b0 04
0460: 03 00 01 00 04 00 01 00 03 00 02 00 00 00 00 00
0470: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 00 00 00
0480: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 45 01 d7 01
0490: 12 09 4a 00 51 00 02 00 05 00 00 00 ee 00 00 00
04a0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04b0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04c0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04d0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
04e0: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
04f0: 31 31 31 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 31 37 32
0500: 2e 30 31 36 2e 31 30 30 2e 31 32 33 00 00 00 00
0510: e5 0c 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0520: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
0530: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 6 (EXPORT FILE) allows exporting a data file from the selected FRAM. If
there is more than one device present, the desired one can be selected. Otherwise the in-
formation is displayed straight away.
After selection of the device, a list of the available files is shown and the file to be exported
can be selected. .
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3
File list (available files):

TapId
SystemInfo
BoardSettings07
SystemConfiguration
Select File Name:

1: TapId
2: SystemInfo
3: BoardSettings07
4: SystemConfiguration
5: no file selected
Select:

If a file is selected, it will be exported to the Terminal with FILE START and FILE END.
Select File Name:

1: TapId
2: SystemInfo
3: BoardSettings07
5: no file selected
Select: 1
--- FILE START ---

TapId
F300000010030000
06010000
--- FILE END -----
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 6 once more and selecting SystemInfo exports the file where the system in-
formation’s are stored. No data is stored there at the moment.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3

Tapid
SystemInfo
BoardSettings07
SystemConfiguration
Select File Name:

1: TapId
2: SystemInfo
3: BoardSettings07
5: no file selected
Select: 2

--- FILE START ---

SystemInfo
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
000000000000000000000000
00000000
--- FILE END -----
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 6 once more and selecting BoardSettings07. All numbers are in hex format.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3

Tapid
SystemInfo
BoardSettings07
SystemConfiguration
Select File Name:

1: TapId
2: SystemInfo
3: BoardSettings07
5: no file selected
Select: 3
--- FILE START ---

BoardSettings07
000000000300000009000000
0C000000
--- FILE END -----
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 6 once more and selecting SystemConfiguration exports the file where the
complete module configuration is saved. All numbers are in hex format.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3

Tapid
SystemInfo
BoardSettings07
SystemConfiguration
Select File Name:

1: TapId
2: SystemInfo
3: BoardSettings07
5: no file selected
Select: 4

--- FILE START ---

SystemConfiguration
56312E323064000019000000C4090000
58020000CEFFB0040300010004000100
03000200000000000000000000000000
00000000040000000000000000000000
000000004501D70112094A0051000200
05000000EE0000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
00000000000000000000000000000000
02313131313131313131310000000000
00000000003137322E3031362E313030
2E31323300000000
E50C0000
--- FILE END -----
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 8 (DELETE FILE) allows deleting a data file from the selected FRAM.
Select the device you intend to look at and choose the File you want to delete.
Please do not delete any file without previously contacting the technical support
(TAFPS.help@mt.com).
There are files you cannot regenerate with your service tools.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3

TapId
SystemInfo
BoardSettings07
SystemConfiguration
Select File Name:

1: TapId
2: SystemInfo
3: BoardSettings07
5: no file selected
Select: 5
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 9 (COMPACT NVDATA) allows a defragmentation of the file system,

avoiding unused memory space between files in the selected FRAM.
If there is more than one device present, the desired one can be selected. Otherwise the
information is displayed straight away.
The available devices are shown with their address (7)
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
(if
1: 1
2: 6
3: 7
Select: 3
Compact NVDATA ...

done
*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key a (RESTORE FILE CONSISTENCY) compares the files of the file system
on one board, with the same files on the other board, and corrects any difference to get an
identical file content on each FRAM. After each change in configuration or data in the mod-
ule, this procedure is automatically started, to readjust the data in all FRAMs to a common
identical status.
Use this feature every time you have to redefine a board type.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: LIST FAT
3: READ DATA
6: EXPORT FILE
8: DELETE FILE
9: COMPACT NVDATA
Restore file consistency ...

done
********************************************************************************************************
The SYSTEM layer allows to check the module power supply, the onboard non volatile RAM,
the XP-Terminal and to make a statistic evaluation of the Analog to Digital converters in the
SERVICETEST SYSTEM MENU
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 1 (POWER SUPPLY) starts the power supply test in a continuous loop.
The PS_OK flag generated on the power supply board is checked.
The voltages + 5V, + 15V, - 15V are directly analyzed, and in the TGA modules the voltages
for the balance are added in the check.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: POWER SUPPLY
2: NVRAM
3: XP-Terminal
4: ADC STATISTICS
Error cases
Power supply test Started

Ps state:not ok
Check ST2 10 pol. cable
Ps analog supply: not ok
Ps +24V supply: not ok

Ps state:not ok
Ps +24V supply: not ok

Ps state:not ok
Ps analog supply: not ok

Ps state:not ok
Missing JP2 on PS board
If everything is ok
Power Supply Test Started...

PS state:ok
You stop this test by pressing the ENTER key
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 (NVRAM) checks the correct write and read function, by writing and reading
a test pattern in the FRAM memory. The original contents of the FRAM are backed-up at the
start, and rewritten to the chip at the end of the test.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: POWER SUPPLY
2: NVRAM
3: XP-Terminal
4: ADC STATISTICS
NVRAM TEST: Press ENTER for each test
NVRAM: TEST DEVICE 7:
Backup FRAM contents

Write test pattern
Read test pattern
Restore FRAM contents
Test passed
NVRAM TEST SUCCESSFUL CPU FRAM 7 OK
If an error occurs during the test operations, the following messages can appear:
Backup failed!
Can't write test pattern!
Can't read test pattern!
Error in test pattern!
Restore failed!
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 (XP-Terminal) checks the correct functioning of the terminal. Follow the
instructions on the terminal. When the test has passed, this will be displayed in the service
software.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: POWER SUPPLY
2: NVRAM
3: XP-Terminal
4: ADC STATISTICS
Choose the desired test from the following list:
****************************************************
SERVICETEST XP TERMINAL MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: HARD KEY TEST
2: SCREEN TEST
3: TOUCH ADJUST
4: BRIGHTNESS TEST
5: CONTRAST TEST
6: BEEPER TEST
After each successfully ended test the following message will be shown:
Performing ……. test...

Test OK
And the XP-Terminal menu shows up again
****************************************************
SERVICETEST XP TERMINAL MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: HARD KEY TEST
2: SCREEN TEST
3: TOUCH ADJUST
4: BRIGHTNESS TEST
5: CONTRAST TEST
6: BEEPER TEST
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 4 (ADC STATISTICS) starts a measurement series of 1002 samples for
each external and each internal ADC channel. The first 2 samples of each ADC channel are
ignored. At the end of the measurements the minimum value, the maximum value, the mean
value and the difference between the maximum and the minimum value of the 1000 valid
samples of each ADC channel are displayed. To get correct values, the module and its envi-
ronment must be in stable conditions to avoid thermal drifts and other artifacts. An Evalua-
tion in an EXCEL sheet can show much better noise and drift performance of each channel.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: POWER SUPPLY
2: NVRAM
3: XP-Terminal
4:ADC STATISTICS
1000 SAMPLES ON EACH ADC / ADC CHANNEL
Nr Tfurnace TSample TDta Gasbox Tcooler Tsamp.cj

0001 00528524 00524210 00000000 00000001 00020376 00040167
0002 00528528 00524211 00000000 00000002 00020377 00040164
......
0994 00528532 00524206 00000000 00000002 00020381 00040177
0995 00528532 00524204 00000000 00000001 00020381 00040178
0996 00528529 00524206 00000000 00000001 00020382 00040177
0997 00528529 00524204 00000000 00000001 00020381 00040178
0998 00528533 00524209 00000000 00000001 00020380 00040175
0999 00528532 00524211 00000000 00000002 00020381 00040175
1000 00528528 00524208 00000000 00000002 00020381 00040177
1001 00528528 00524204 00000000 00000002 00020381 00040179
1002 00528533 00524206 00000000 00000002 00020380 00040176
Par Tfurnace TSample TDta Gasbox Tcooler Tsamp.cj

Min 00528517 00524198 00000000 00000000 00020375 00040164
Max 00528538 00524217 00000000 00000004 00020383 00040181
Mean 528527.194 524206.633 0.000 1.675 20378.908 40172.293
Diff 00000021 00000019 00000000 00000004 00000008 00000017
Pressing any key stops this test
*********************************************************************************************************

The FURNACE layer allows checking the furnace temperature, to control the furnace power
supply and to check the furnace movements in the SERVICETEST FURNACE MENU
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 1 (MEASURE FURNACE TEMP) calibrates the ADC of the furnace tem-
perature channel (cell temperature channel) and displays the cell temperature Tc, the ADC
converts the value from the furnace temperature sensor (thermocouples).
****************************************************
SERVICETEST FURNACE MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: MEASURE FURNACE TEMP
2: CONTROL FURNACE POWER
3: MOVE Furnace
Calibrate ext. ADC in progress...

success
FurnaceTemp Tc: 24.9°C ADC: 3554

.
.
.
Pressing any key stops the measuring procedure.
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 (CONTROL FURNACE POWER) calibrates the ADC of the (furnace)
cell temperature channel, enables the furnace power supply, and starts a ramp signal on the
DAC controlling the heating power, with steps of ~2%, between 0 % and 100 %. The DAC
heating voltage is displayed in % and the (furnace) cell temperature Tc in °C.
Attention!!!!! Power heats up the cell!!!!!
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
3: MOVE FURNACE
Calibrate ext. ADC in progress...

success
OK DAC: 1 % Temp: 24.9 °C
OK DAC: 11 % Temp: 24.9 °C
OK DAC: 13 % Temp: 24.9 °C
.
.
OK DAC: 95 % Temp: 28.3 °C
OK DAC: 97 % Temp: 28.6 °C
OK DAC: 99 % Temp: 29.0 °C
OK DAC: 100 % Temp: 29.3 °C
OK DAC: 99 % Temp: 29.7 °C
OK DAC: 97 % Temp: 30.1 °C
OK DAC: 95 % Temp: 30.5 °C
.
.
.
Pressing any key stops the test. Do not overheat the cell!!!!!
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 (MOVE FURNACE) enables the test of the furnace movement. The
movement of the furnace can be started and changed in direction by pressing the "SPACE"
key.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
3: MOVE FURNACE
Furnace test <Space-Key>open/close,<Enter>quit

furnace is opening...
furnace is closing...
furnace is closed.......
Pressing the ENTER key stops the test.
********************************************************************************************************

COOLER
The COOLER layer allows checking the temperature of the cooling flange.
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
Pressing key 1 (MEASURE COOLER TEMP) measures and displays the temperature
of the cooling flange Tcool. The ADC is a 16-bit converter on the controller board and uses
one of 4 channels. The cooler temperature is detected on channel 3.
****************************************************
SERVICETEST COOLER MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: MEASURE COOLER TEMP
2: FAN TEST
Cooler Temperature Test

Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Tcool: 31.9°C OK
Pressing any key stops the test.
********************************************************************************************************

The PERIPHERALS layer allows checking the function of the line relay, of the gas controller
and of the sync communication link in the SERVICETEST PERIPHERALS MENU
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
********************************************************************************************************
Pressing key 1 (LINE RELAY) allows checking the line relay. Pressing the SPACE key,
switches the relay on and off, displaying the relay status
****************************************************
SERVICETEST PERIPH. MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: LINE RELAY
2: GAS BOX
3: SYNC
Peripheral line test <Space-Key> on/off, <Enter> quit

Switch line on
Switch line off
Switch line on
Switch line off
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 (GAS BOX) allows checking the (old) gas controllers of the type GC10 and
GC20. Pressing the v key, switches the valve that selects and activates the gas channel of
your choice. CH 1 or CH 2. A flow meter in the gas controller measures the actual flow value
on the selected channel and displays it on the terminal screen in ml / min.
This only works for the “old” gas controllers of the type GC10 and GC20. If a new gas
controller (GC100 or GC200) is hooked up, the message “no gas box connected” is
shown.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: LINE RELAY
2: GAS BOX
3: SYNC
Gas box test <v> CH1/CH2, <CR> quit

" v " pressed flow N2 CH2: 26 ml/min
flow N2 CH2: 27 ml/min
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 (SYNC) allows you to check the sync communication link. The test connec-
tor must be plugged to the sync port on the back of the power supply unit.
****************************************************
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: LINE RELAY
2: GAS BOX
3: SYNC
Sync test: Plug in test con.
Type ENTER to start the test
Sync test is running...

OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
Pressing again the ENTER key stops the test.
If there is an error in the circuit or the test connector is not plugged, the following message is
sent:
Sync test: Plug in test con.
Sync test is running...

SYNC ON failed
OK
SYNC ON failed
OK
SYNC ON failed
OK
SYNC ON failed
OK
SYNC ON failed
OK
********************************************************************************************************

The TGA layer allows to measure certain temperatures and to check the parameters of the
sample robot.
****************************************************
SERVICETEST MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
1: INFORMATION
3: SYSTEM
4: FURNACE
5: COOLER
6: PERIPHERALS
7: TGA
********************************************************************************************************
Pressing key 1 (MEASURE SAMPLE TEMPERATURE) calibrates the ADC of the
sample temperature and shows the temperature values. With a DTA or DSC sensor this cor-
responds to the reference temperature.
****************************************************
SERVICETEST TMA MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: MEASURE DTA TEMP
Calibrate ext.ADC in progress...

Success
SampleTemp Ts: 30.6°C ADC: -69 Tscj:31.0°C

Pressing any key stops the measuring procedure.
********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 2 (MEASURE DTA TEMPERATURE) calibrates the ADC of the DTA
temperature and shows the temperature values. This only works properly if a DTA or a DSC-
Sensor are built in and the module is capable of handling these signals (DTA-board installed)
0: BACK
2: MEASURE DTA TEMP
Calibrate ext.ADC in progress...

success
DtaTemp Tdta: 25.6°C ADC:0000390 Tscj:23.1°C

If the module is equipped with the DMA-board but only a SDTA-sensor is built in, the results
look like this:
DtaTemp Tdta:-111978.0°C ADC:-524288 Tscj:25.7°C
If the module is not equipped with the DMA-board, the results look like this:
DtaTemp Tdta:-----°C ADC:----- Tscj:22.9°C

*********************************************************************************************************

Pressing key 3 (SAMPLE ROBOT PARAMETERS) shows the parameters which were
established during the robot calibration
****************************************************
SERVICETEST TGA MENU
****************************************************
0: BACK
2: MEASURE DTA TEMP
DISPLAY ADJUSTMENT-STEPS OF SAMPLE ROBOT

ADJUSTMENT 1 STEPS TURNTABLE TO POS 1 7
ADJUSTMENT 2 STEPS LIFT REF TO TTABLE 74
ADJUSTMENT 3 STEPS LIFT REF TO SENSOR 108
ADJUSTMENT 4 STEPS GRIPPER > TOUCH PAN 31
ADJUSTMENT 5 STEPS LIFT REF TO MID PAN 100
DISPLAY FRAM ADJUST-DATA OF SAMPLE ROBOT
ADJUSTMENT 1 STEPS TURNTABLE TO POS 1 74
ADJUSTMENT 2 STEPS LIFT REF TO TTABLE 325
ADJUSTMENT 3 STEPS LIFT REF TO SENSOR 2322
ADJUSTMENT 4 STEPS GRIPPER > TOUCH PAN 81
ADJUSTMENT 5 STEPS LIFT REF TO MID PAN 471
*********************************************************************************************************

5.5 Service Mode on the SmartSens Terminal

Every TGA/DSC 1 module is
equipped with a SmartSense
Terminal. There exists a ser-
vice mode which gives the
possibility to run certain tests
and to calibrate the sample
robot.
On the sides there are sev-
eral keys with a fixed func-
tion. On the display different
buttons are displayed ac-
cording to the selected func-
tion.
5.5.1 Entering the service mode
• Press the SETUP key

• Press the soft key
SERVICE
• Type in the password
2121.
• The Service Menu offers
the following functions:
- Robot
- Module setup
- Download resources
- Reset TCP/IP
- Boot
- Exit
• With the password 2007
the customer can only ad-
just the robot height and
some configurations

5.5.2 Robot functions

In the Robot menu you can
• adjust the robot
• test the robot
• view the adjustment parameters
Adjust Robot
In this mode the robot parameters can be adjusted and viewed. Beside the full adjustment
procedure (Robot) two single adjustments can be run (Sensor height and pan light barrier).
Single steps of the full adjustment can be redone by pressing “retry”. Follow the instructions
on the Terminal to complete the tasks.
• Robot starts the complete robot adjustment. To run it you need the “dummy pan” and the
“gauge block”. The robot does some initial testing and then starts with the turntable pos. 1
- adjustment
¾ Adjust turntable to pos. 1 (horizontally)
“Step” moves the sample tray one step to the left. Repeat until the gripper is fully cen-
tered over sample position 1. Press “OK” when satisfied to get to the next adjustment.
You need to confirm this with “OK” or you can get back to the former adjustment again
with the “back” key.
¾ Adjust lift to turntable (vertically)
“Step” or “5 Steps” moves the gripper down. Adjust it so that the gripper just touches
the sample tray. Confirm with “OK”
¾ Adjust gauge block to sensor
- Put the gauge block into position 1.
- The robot catches the gauge block after “OK”, and moves down until the gauge
block touches the sample holder. This might take a while.
- It asks to remove the gauge block and to confirm with “OK”
¾ Adjust gripper to touch pan (close gripper)
- Put dummy pan on pos. 1
- “Step” or “5 Steps” closes the gripper. Add 3 more steps when the gripper holds the
dummy pan.
- Confirm with “OK”
- The robot catches the pan
- Confirm this with “OK”
¾ Adjust pan to light barrier
- Confirm that the dummy pan is in the gripper
- The thickness of the dummy pan is checked. It should be in the range of 32 ± 4 units
- The dummy pan is put onto the sample holder and retrieved
- If everything went fine, confirm with “OK” and save the parameters with “OK”

• Sensor height This adjusts the gauge block to the sensor. It is a part of the complete
calibration and can be used if e.g. only the sensor was changed
¾ Put the gauge block into position 1.
¾ The robot catches the gauge block after “OK”, and moves down until the gauge block
touches the sample holder. This might take a while.
¾ It asks to remove the gauge block and to confirm with “OK”
• Pan light barrier gives the number of steps, during which the pan is detected by the light
barrier. It should be in the range of 32 ± 4. This test can be used to adjust the potentiome-
ter on the sample detection board.
¾ Put a dummy pan in position 1 and confirm with “OK”.
¾ The sample changer catches the sample, moves it past the light barrier and displays a
value for its thickness.
¾ If the value is too far off, the potentiometer is to be adjusted and the test can be run
again until the desired value is reached.
¾ Quit with “home”. The dummy pan is put back. There is no parameter to be stored.
• Home leaves the sample robot calibration and goes back to the home menu. No adjust-
ment values are stored, but the former ones are kept.
• Parameter There are 5 parameters which are adjusted during a robot adjustment. On the
right hand side the total values are shown. These are the values that are stored in the
FRAM. On the left hand side the offset values are shown. These are the number of steps
from the initial position of each parameter.
Test Robot
In this mode every single function of the robot can be controlled. Every movement can be
repeated as many times as required in automatic mode or manually. Adjustment parame-
ters are NOT changed.
• The gripper can be moved in single steps (only one direction). If the automatic mode is
chosen the gripper closes and opens again. The number of steps are counted and if there
were steps lost this is indicated on the display.
• Next always brings you to the next test.
• The robot can be moved downwards and upwards in single steps or automatically. In the
automatic mode the number of steps are counted and if steps were lost this is indicated.
• The sample robot plate can be moved forth and back in single steps. In the automatic
mode it goes from the initial position to position 2 and back. The number of steps are
counted and if steps were lost this is indicated.
• The pan recognition test is a go/no go test for the light barrier. It gives the result of the test:
“no pan recognized” or
“pan recognized”
The test can be run empty or with an object in the light barrier to check its function.
After this test this mode can only be left with “home” which exits the service mode.
Home
Home leaves this level and goes back to the home menu.

Parameters
There are 5 parameters which are adjusted during a robot adjustment. On the right hand
side the total values are shown. These are the values that are stored in the FRAM. On the
left hand side the offset values are shown. These are the number of steps from the initial
position of each parameter.
5.5.3 Module setup

There is a set of parameters for each module which can be set via this terminal. They can
also be changed with the TAServiceTool from the PC. For more detailed information see
section 5.4.4, “system configuration”.
The parameters that can be set:
Page 1: - Identification number (ID)
- TCP/IP address (this is only an information! The effective TCP/IP address on
the communication board must be set with the TAServiceTool
- Furnace type (small, large, high temperature)
- Sensor type
Page 2: - Furnace power supply
- Minimum temperature
- Maximum temperature
- Cooling option
Page 3: - Furnace control parameters (P,I,D): Do not change these parameters from the
default values unless you have advanced knowledge about the temperature
regulation
- Power line frequency
Page 4: - Reserved parameters 1, 2 and 3: These parameters are used for DSC- and
DTA-Sensors. Use the values which come with the instrument.
- Date of next service: If the actual date is past the chosen date, the following sign
appears on the SmartSense Terminal.
Page 5: - Furnace hold temp. timeout (in minutes)
- Experiment balance mode (default: 1)
- Standby balance mode (default: 0)

5.5.4 Download resources

This function is used after a firmware upgrade. It checks whether it is necessary to load new
resources (Icons, Buttons, etc) to the terminal and does it if applicable.
5.5.5 Reset TCP/IP

This function restarts the TCP/IP communication board. The parameters (like the IP-
Address) are not changed. This can be used if there are problems with the Ethernet commu-
nication.
5.5.6 Boot
Boot does a booting of the module. This can be used if the automatic booting does not work
when loading the firmware, entering the service mode or leaving it.
5.5.7 Exit
Exit leaves the service mode and brings you back to the SETUP-Screen.

5.6 Loading the firmware

5.6.1 Download the required firmware
• Download the required firmware from the Extranet (e.g. DSC1 V2_XX.mot) and store it
onto the hard disk. Make sure to load the newest version.
5.6.2 Installation (Uploading) of the Firmware onto the TA module

• Use the existing connection between TA module to the PC via a switch or a crossed
Ethernet cable
• Make sure that the TA module is not connected in the STARe software
• Start the TAServiceTool
• Check that under settings the option “show history” is NOT selected
• Go to settings / communication
• Under TCP/IP Settings / Hostname type in the IP address of the TA-instrument onto which
you want to install the firmware
• The Port should always be set to 10001
• After setting these values click OK.
Notes:
The IP number 192.168.1.34 is just an example, your IP address will probably be different.
“Delay” is the time during which the system tries to establish the connection

• Tick the Module checkbox and select the firmware motfile which you like to upload
• Now connect the TA-module. (fourth symbol from the left hand side)
Make sure you are getting the following, in the screenshot highlighted message
TCP/IP connection to host XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX port 10001 OK

• Click on download, the module boots automatically and starts uploading the new module
software (In the unlikely event that it does not reboot automatically you have the chance to
boot your instrument via the SmartSens Terminal within the time specified in “delay” or
with the red reset bottom on the µProcessor board). Note: Before you start the upload the
module must be in Idle mode, the balance must have started up.

• The firmware is now uploading

• After the upload has finished you will get the messages below and the module will reboot
automatically.
• On the SmartSens Terminal you can check the new firmware version by pressing Setup /
System info.
• On the SmartSens Terminal you need to execute “download resources” (see also 5.5.4)
¾ Press “setup”
¾ Push “service” and enter the password 2121
¾ Push “dwnld. ress.” (download resources)
¾ Press “home”
• Uploading of the firmware is now completed

5.7 Reloading the balance configuration

(only for service personnel trained on balances)
If there is need to reconfigure the balance (e.g. after an exchange of a PCB or if there is
suspicion that some configuration data is lost) this can be done by using the balance service
software LARS.
Procedure
• A serial cable (9 pin) must be connected to the balance electronics inside the module (the
rear housing and the cover on the electronics must be removed).
• There is no need to start the balance in a different mode.
• Settings for the serial communication: SmartMode (recommended) or
19200 / Even / 1 / Hardware / RTS-CTS
• Start LARS
• Establish a connection to the balance: LARS Æ File Æ New (or CTRL-N)
• Select: LARS Æ Data Æ Type Definition
• Select the correct type: MX1-TGA, MX5-TGA, UMX1-TGA or UMX5-TGA
• Highlight the TDNR and click on LOAD
All the relevant configuration parameters are set by this procedure.
The adjustments (weight, temperature) are not affected.


TGA/DSC 1 Maintenance
CONTENTS PAGE
6 Maintenance........................................................................................................ 6-3
6.1 Routine Maintenance.......................................................................................... 6-3
6.1.1 SOP for routine maintenance ............................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Check procedures .............................................................................................. 6-3
6.3 TGA balance reproducibility test with module friedA ..................................... 6-4
6.3.1 Requirements ....................................................................................................... 6-4
6.3.2 Procedure ............................................................................................................. 6-4
6.3.3 Results.................................................................................................................. 6-6

Maintenance TGA/DSC 1

6 Maintenance
6.1 Routine Maintenance
There exists a standard operating procedure (SOP) which is to be used for routine mainte-
nance.
6.1.1 SOP for routine maintenance

Please see this SOP on the next pages as an example. Use an original printout of the new-
est SOP version available on the extranet (www.mtanainfo.com) to perform a routine main-
tenance.
6.2 Check procedures

Checklist maintenance
Please use the original SOP to perform the maintenance.

6.3 TGA balance reproducibility test with module friedA

6.3.1 Requirements
• A certified 1 gram calibration weight for UMX5 or MX5 balances (see section 3 in this
manual)
• A certified 0.2 gram calibration weight for UMX1 or MX1 balances
• Sample robot (without sample robot 10 replacements of the weight are necessary, which
can last up to 1 hour)
• 20 ml/min protective gas (N2 or Air)
• No purge gas or reactive gas
• The module must be in operation since about 16 hours (temperature stabilization)
• A stable environment is essential
• The furnace temperature must have cooled down to ambient temperature
6.3.2 Procedure
Preparation:
• In the install window:
• Reload the relevant module
• Set the standby temperature to 15 °C
• Store it as a new module with the name friedA…..(friedA in front of the module name)
• Disconnect the former module and connect the new module friedA….
• In the module window:
• Go to “Control” and “Configuration”
• Uncheck “Autostart”
• Create a method with the following parameters:
• Isothermal segment: 15 °C, 10 min.
• Sample holder:
• “Calibration weight 1 gr” for 1 gr weight with UMX5 or MX5.
• “Aluminum light 20 μl” for 0.2 gr weight with UMX1 or MX1
• Select the standby mode (standby temperature) on the SmartSens terminal
• Send an experiment with the just created method to the module (It does not start auto-
matically as “Autostart” is off. Do not start the experiment)
• Place the weight (1 gr upside down) on position 1 of the sample robot (if there
is one)
• In the module window go to “Service” and start “TGA-Repro-Check”
• A window appears where you can select the number of cycles (normally 10 are used)
• Press OK
With a robot:
• The measurement should start now and do the whole calibration
• If an additional window appears follow the instructions

Without a robot:
• You have to place and remove the weight manually according to the dialog below
• If an additional window appears follow the instructions
• In the lower left corner of the module window the following messages appear:
• TGA-REPRO Waits for zero weight (continues automatically)
• TGA-REPRO Waits until inserted (confirm with ok when done)
• TGA-REPRO Waits for ref weight (auto)
• TGA-REPRO Waits until removed (confirm with ok)
• TGA-REPRO Waits for zero weight (auto)
• ……..
• The results are automatically stored in the file
…\ STAReSW \ log \ TGAREPRO.LOG.txt

6.3.3 Results
The log file should look like this:
The change of the zero weight is an indication of the drift of the balance.
The results of main interest are:

• mean value of the weight (difference): 200.0067 mg in this example
• standard deviation of the weight (difference): 0.0007 mg in this example
For tolerances see logbook
Important note:
• For good results the environment of the instrument must be stable
• Does not work during weather changes or thunderstorms
• The module must be in operation since about 16 hours including cryostat
• The protective gas should be N2 or Air with a stable flow of about 20 ml/min



TGA/DSC 1 Replacement and Repair
CONTENTS PAGE
7 Replacement and Repair.................................................................................... 7-3

7.1 Instructions ......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Partial disassembly of the TGA/DSC 1 ............................................................. 7-4
7.2.1 Disassembly of the front housings........................................................................ 7-4
7.2.2 Disassembly of the rear housing .......................................................................... 7-4
7.3 Replacing the sensor ......................................................................................... 7-5
7.3.1 Centering the sensor horizontally in the furnace................................................... 7-5
7.3.2 Centering the sensor vertically in the furnace....................................................... 7-6
7.4 Replacing the “furnace complete” .................................................................... 7-7
7.5 Replacing the heating element (only 1100 °C) or the heating assembly ....... 7-8
7.6 Replacing the furnace position end switches or the stepper motor............ 7-10
7.7 Replacing the analog board or the thermocouple board .............................. 7-12
7.8 Replacing the furnace power amplifier........................................................... 7-13
7.8.1 Replacing components inside the furnace power amplifier................................. 7-14
7.9 Removing and installing the line module ....................................................... 7-16
7.9.1 Replacing components of the line module .......................................................... 7-17
7.10 Replacing the power supply module .............................................................. 7-20
7.11 Replacing the µProcessor board..................................................................... 7-21
7.12 SmartSens Terminal ......................................................................................... 7-22
7.12.1 Repair of the SmartSens Terminal ..................................................................... 7-22
7.12.2 Servicing of the SmartSens Terminal ................................................................. 7-22
7.12.3 Adjustment and greasing of the terminals support structure............................... 7-22
7.13 Upgrades / Repair Service / RMA .................................................................... 7-23
7.13.1 Upgrade from small to large furnace .................................................................. 7-23
7.13.2 Upgrade to a different sensor ............................................................................. 7-23
7.13.3 Procedure for balance repair service .................................................................. 7-24
7.13.4 RMA Form .......................................................................................................... 7-25

Replacement and Repair TGA/DSC 1

7 Replacement and Repair

7.1 Instructions
Warning applicable to all corrective maintenance work before opening

the instrument:
h Allow the furnace to cool down to <60 °C.
h Take out the crucible(s) and close the furnace.
h Switch off the module and disconnect the power plug.
h Give attention to the water circuits, the water can flow out!

7.2 Partial disassembly of the TGA/DSC 1

7.2.1 Disassembly of the front housings
• There are two different versions of the left hand side front housing.
• In case there is a sample robot unscrew the T25 Torx screw, the captive hex screw under
the chassis and the two Allen screws (size 4), accessible from the inside after swinging the
robot to the side.
• In case there is no sample robot unscrew the T25 Torx screw and the captive hex screw
under the chassis
• Detach the right hand side front housing by unscrewing the T25 Torx screw, the captive
hex screws under the chassis and the two allen screw (size 4), where one allen screw
connects the two front housings and one attaches the housing to the side cover.
Pay attention to the connecting cable of the smart sense terminal.
7.2.2 Disassembly of the rear housing

• Unscrew the four T25 Torx screws of the rear housing on both sides of the chassis.
• Pull the rear housing slightly backwards and lift it up.

7.3 Replacing the sensor

• Refer to section 9.7 of the operating manual. This covers the replacement of a sensor with
one of the same type.
• If necessary, center the sensor in the furnace (see section 7.3.1 or 7.3.2 below)
• Changing to a different type of sensor might require some hardware upgrade which is de-
scribed in section 7.13.2 of this service manual.
• If this replacement concerns a DTA or a DSC sensor the adjustment of the reserved pa-
rameters (section 8.5 of this manual) must be carried out.
7.3.1 Centering the sensor horizontally in the furnace
• Disassemble the front housing (see

section 7.2.1)
• Remove the top and front insulation
from the balance
• Loosen the 4 screws that fix the bal-
ance housing top
• Carefully remove the balance housing
top (lift it up vertically)
• Loosen the 4 standoffs with a 5.5 mm
size wrench about one turn
• The whole balance can now be moved
slightly. Adjust it so that the crucible
holder is nicely centered in the furnace.
For best results place a crucible onto
the sensor, remove the rear cover of
the furnace and close it about half.
Check with a flash light if necessary.
Make sure the beam of the sensor does
not touch the opening of the balance
housing.
• Tighten the 4 standoffs carefully (do not
tighten to hard, the thread is fine)
• Recheck the position of the sensor
• Put the balance housing top back
(watch the O-ring and the cables) and
put the 4 screws back. Place the insula-
tion back.
• Reassemble the front housings

7.3.2 Centering the sensor vertically in the furnace

•
• Note how much to change the vertical
position
• Remove the sensor
• Disassemble the front housing (see
section 7.2.1)
• Remove the top and front insulation
from the balance
• Loosen the 4 screws that fix the bal-
ance housing top
• Carefully remove the balance housing
top (lift it up vertically)
• Loosen the 4 standoffs with a 5.5 mm
size wrench
• Lift the balance, turn it slightly sideways
and put it onto the balance housing
• Reinstall the sensor
• Carefully loosen the 2 screws shown on
the picture. Make sure not to bend the
frail copper part. Hold it with your fingers
while loosening the screws.
• Adjust the vertical position by the amount
that was previously determined
• Retighten the 2 screws carefully
• Remove the sensor
• Put the balance back into its position
• Reinstall the sensor
• Repeat the procedure if the position is
not satisfactory
• Tighten the 4 standoffs carefully (do not
tighten to hard, the thread is fine)
• Recheck the position of the sensor. For
best results place a crucible onto the
sensor, remove the rear cover of the fur-
nace and close it about half. Check with
a flash light if necessary. Make sure the
beam of the sensor does not touch the
opening of the balance housing
• Put the balance housing top back (watch
the O-ring and the cables) and put the 4
screws back. Place the insulation back.
• Reassemble the front housings

7.4 Replacing the “furnace complete”

• Disassemble the front housing (see section 7.2.1)
• Remove all crucibles from the sensor, leave the furnace open.
• Switch the TGA/DSC 1 off and disconnect the power cable
• Remove the sensor as described in chapter 9.7 of the operating manual.
• Disconnect the intracooler and remove the water from within the TGA/DSC 1-cooling
system
• Disconnect the two red water hoses from the furnace c
• Undo the furnace control plug (on the chassis) d
• Remove the furnace heating connector (behind the balance) and unscrew the metal
bracket which fixes the counter part to the chassis (size-4 allen screw) e
• Loosen the size-4 Allen crew and the knurled red screw which fix the furnace to the
tooth bar and the guiding bar. f
• Now the furnace can be pulled from the bars carefully
• Remove the four hex screws which fix the metal sheet to the bracket g
• Pull the furnace cables through the opening in the mounting bracket
• Loosen the four Philips screws and remove the hand guard h
• Install the new “furnace complete” in reverse order.

• Perform a complete calibration.

7.5 Replacing the heating element (only 1100 °C) or the heat-
ing assembly
• Remove the “furnace complete” (see section 7.4)
• Blow out the cooling water channel
• Detach the small transparent tubing
• Remove the outer left furnace flange (3 Torx 20 screws) c
• Remove the inner left furnace flange (3 Torx 20 screws) d
• Remove the 3 recessed Torx 20 screws to loosen the cooling jacket from the right furnace
flange while holding it vertically e
• Remove the cooling jacket and inner cylinder which probably stick together f,g
• Remove the furnace insulation h
If replacing the whole heating unit i

• Unscrew the furnace power cables (brown and white) and the furnace thermocouple wires
(bare wires to the CJ board) j
• Remove the heating unit from the furnace support by unscrewing the 4 Torx 20 screws
(only slightly recessed) k
• Mount the new heating unit in the reverse order observing the general hints below
If replacing the heating element

• Remove the two screws of the heater connection l
• Slide off the two sleeves
• Remove the heater
• Bend the new heater like the old one and mount it.
• Pay attention to the thermocouple which has to stay in its place
• Put back the two sleeves and fix them with a drop of Ceramabond on each end
• Reinstall everything in the reverse order observing the general hints below
General hints
• Clean all O-rings and sealing surfaces and slightly grease the O-rings with Dow Corning
111 grease. Replace damaged seals. Be careful not to damage the flat rubber seals with
the screws going through them.
• Mind the orientation of the inner cylinder. The two ends are not identical.
• There is a pin on the right furnace flange. Turn the cooling jacket and inner cylinder clock
wise until the pin stops them. By this a free cooling water flow is assured.
• To avoid particles from the furnace insulation to affect the seals, put it back after the cool-
ing jacket and the inner cylinder have been fixed.
• Grease all screws slightly with Molykote PG-30L (aluminum parts and steel screws).

1 2 4 5 6 3 9
7 11
10

7.6 Replacing the furnace position end switches or the stepper

motor
• Remove all crucibles from the sensor, leave the furnace open.
• Switch the TGA/DSC 1 off and disconnect the power cable
• Remove the sensor as described in section 9.7 of the operating manual.
• Remove the furnace by loosening the size-4 allen crew and the knurled red screw which
fix it to the tooth bar and the guiding bar c and lay it beside the module
• Remove the isolating foam from the balance
• Disconnect the 2 connectors from the balance d
• Disconnect the furnace driver connector from the power supply
• Remove the two red water hoses connecting to the balance e
• Pull the module about 15 cm to the front in order to access the two holes from the bottom
• Remove the two size-3 allen screws which fix the furnace driver to the balance and pull the
unit down f
• Remove the three size-4 allen screws, remove the balance and put it gently on a horizon-
tal surface g
• The furnace drive unit can now be worked on
If replacing an end switch

• The furnace open switch is the μ-switch h on the right hand side, the furnace closed
switch is a small PCB i to the left hand side
• To replace the μ-switch you have to unsolder the cables, the PCP has a connector
• If replacing the μ-switch put shrink tubing on the connections after resoldering it
• Follow the procedure below for reassembly of the instrument
If replacing the stepper motor

• Remove steel sheet cover from the furnace drive unit j
• Remove the two screws which fix the motor to the block and remove the motor k.
• Disconnect the 4 motor wires from the green connector and connect the wires of the new
motor
• Put the new motor in its position without fixing the screws
• Put a small piece of paper (0.1 mm thick, ca. 5 mm wide) between the cog wheel and the
tooth bar
• Fix the two screws while pressing the motor towards the tooth bar
• Pull the tooth bar to the side until the paper can be removed
• There should be a small play now between the cog wheel and the tooth bar
• Put the steel sheet cover back (mind the correct orientation)

Reassembly of the unit

• Put the furnace driver onto the chassis approximately where it belongs
• Mount the balance with the 3 screws
• Push the furnace driver upwards - minding the two guiding pins l - and fix it with its two
screws
• Reconnect the connectors and reinstall the water hoses
• Put back the furnace and fix it with the 2 screws
• If necessary adjust the furnace closed or open position with the two set screws on the
sides of the steel sheet cover 11
• Complete the reassembly in the reverse order of the disassembly
2 5
4
10
11
1
7
9 6 11

7.7 Replacing the analog board or the thermocouple board

Note: Do not tilt or turn the complete instrument.
This could damage the balance seriously!
You can either put the instrument on two tables with a gap in between in order to access the
analog board from below or remove the balance and tilt the instrument afterwards.
Version “two tables”

• Take out the sample crucible and close the furnace.
• Place the instrument carefully over two tables with a gap in between in order to access the
analog board from below.
• Continue below
Version “Turn to the side”

• Remove the crucibles and the sensor and install the
transport locking device.
• Remove the furnace by loosening the size-4 allen crew
and the knurled red screw which fix it to the tooth bar
and the guiding bar and lay it beside the module
• Remove the isolating foam from the balance.
• Disconnect the 2 connectors from the balance.
• Disconnect the furnace driver connector from the power
supply.
• Remove the two red water hoses connecting to the bal-
ance.
• Loosen the three size-4 Allen screws, remove the bal-
ance and put it gently on a support that holds it horizon-
tally (the bottom part is not a flat surface).
• Turn the instrument on its left side, being aware of the furnace which is still connected to
the instrument.
Common procedure:
• Remove the 10 nuts (M4) holding the metal cover below the analog board.
Analog board:
• Disconnect the 3 ribbon cables from the plugs ST3, ST4 and ST12.
• Undo the 12 screws at the PC-board terminals to remove the sensor wires.
• Unscrew the 5 fastener screws (M4) of the analog board and replace the analog board.
• Reconnect the sensor wires with help of the general diagram. Carefully tighten the screws.
• Place the ribbon cables to the plugs ST3, ST4 and ST12.
• Offset adjustment of the measuring amplifiers must be done (see section 8.4.1).
Thermocouple board:
• Same procedure as for the Analog board, inclusive adjustment (see section 8.4.2) .
• Reinstall everything in the reverse order.

7.8 Replacing the furnace power amplifier

• Perform partial disassembly (see section 7.2).
• Unscrew the 10 screws of the top cable cover and remove it.
• Unscrew the 2 remaining screws of the power supply cover and remove it.
• Disconnect ST4 from the power supply board.
• Press the rear panel of the power supply module outwards in order to remove the cable
including its grommet.
• Disconnect the furnace power connector
• Unscrew the 4 fastener screws of the furnace power amplifier.
• Push the furnace power amplifier a short distance to the side and disconnect the power
plug ST50 (this is the connection of the line module to the furnace power amplifier).
• Install the new furnace power amplifier in the reverse order.
• Check the configuration of the module parameters.
Connection to line
module

7.8.1 Replacing components inside the furnace power amplifier
Replacing the fan

• Dismount the furnace
power amplifier accord- A
ing to the prior instruc-
tions.
• Unscrew the eight Phil-
lips screws on the top
and sidewall to remove A
the module cover. (A)
• Unscrew the four Phillips
screws holding the air fil-
ter of the fan and remove
the air filter. (B)
• Disconnect the ribbon
cable (C); blue and red B
power cables (D) and the
black and white cables A
(E).
• Remove the three coun-
tersunk screws on the
back of the module to de-
tach the power box and
tilt it out (F).
D
• Remove the two Phillips
screws on one side (G)
and the two countersunk
screws on the other side
(H) of the power box and
lift up that cover. E
• Disconnect the fan cable
(I), push it through the
hole in the cover (K) and
replace the fan.
• Clean dust away from the C
inside of the whole fur-
nace amplifier module
using a brush or com-
pressed air.
• Reassemble the module
in the reverse order.


7.9 Removing and installing the line module

• Perform partial disassembly (see section 7.2)
• Unscrew the top cable cover.
• Unscrew the line module cover.
• Pull off the connector at ST1 of the power supply module and unscrew the three connec-
tions (red, black and shielding) of the grey cable from the terminals.
• Disconnect the power cable ST50 to the furnace power amplifier.
• Loosen the 2 front and the 2 rear fastener screws of the line module.
• Take out the line module backward.
• Install the new one in reverse order.

7.9.1 Replacing components of the line module
Replacing the fuse holder

• Disconnect connection cable of the fuse holder
• Undo plastic nut of fuse holder
• Replace fuse holder
• Carefully tighten plastic nut
• Plug in cable as shown in section 10
• Insert correct fuse with proper rating
Replacing the power switch

• Using a screwdriver, press the two upper retaining clips at the rear of the power switch
alternately downward and backward
• Pull out power switch from cutout
• Remove shrink collar on connection leads
• Unsolder cable of the power switch
• Replace power switch
• Pull shrink collar over connection leads
• Solder cable onto new power switch as shown in section 10
• Pull shrink collar over the soldering points and shrink on
• Press power switch into plate cutout
Replacing the power plug or the power receptacle

• Disconnect all cables from the power plug / receptacle
• Disconnect grounding cable using open ended wrench
• Unscrew 2 fastener screws
• Replace power plug / receptacle
• Reconnect all cables as shown in section 10

Replacing the line filter

• Disconnect connection cables at line filter
• Unscrew 2 screws at support of the 5 fuse holders
• Push support sideways
• Undo 2 retaining nuts at mounting bracket of line filter
• Pull off control cable connectors of the switched line socket
(red and black cable)
• Loosen 2 retaining nuts of 2nd bracket plate of the line filter
bushing, but do not undo completely
• Lift bracket and tilt it toward base of line module
• Lift up mounting bracket of line filter at top end and at the same time separate the line filter
bushing at the 2nd bracket plate
• Unscrew 2 fastener screws of the line filter
• Replace the line filter
• Complete assembly in reverse order
• Attach all cables as shown in section 10
Replacing the switched line socket

• Pull off all cable connectors from the relay board
• Unscrew 3 fastener screws of the Relay board
• Replace relay board
Replacing the voltage selector

• Pull off all cable connectors at voltage selector
• Unscrew 2 fastener screws at cover of the voltage
115V
selector
• Remove voltage selector with cover voltage
selector
• Set new voltage selector to match local power line position for 115V
position for 230V
voltage
230V
• Mount voltage selector so that the setting is visible

• Attach all cables as shown in section 10 voltage
selector
b a

Replacing the transformer

• Disconnect transformer connections to the fuse holders
SI3 through SI7
• Undo nut of cable tie fastening
• Remove cable ties of the output cables (with 9-pin con-
nector ST1)
• Pull off transformer connections at connector ST1
• Pull off transformer connections at voltage selector
• Disconnect 2 grounding cables of the transformer
• Unscrew transformer fastening in center using an Allen
key
• Replace transformer
• With transformer fastening, ensure that the groove of the retaining nut is in the plate slot.
• Install new cable ties

7.10 Replacing the power supply module

• Unscrew 4 screws of top cable cover
• Remove the cover
• Pull off connector ST1 (furnace open/close)
• Pull off connector ST1 (fan/line relay)
• Pull off connector ST1 (VAC of line module)
• Unscrew screws of the power supply module
• Push back power supply module about 3 cm
• Take two round cables with the cable grommets out
of slots distance
with important
• Place power supply module on a secure support isolation
With a peripheral option board:

• Unscrew two screws in upper region of rear wall of module
• Disconnect peripheral board
• Pull off ribbon cable of connection ST21
Replacing power supply board:

• Unscrew screening plate
• Unscrew 3 screws M4 of the power supply module; the third screw is in the cooling block
• Unscrew three spacer sleeves
• Replace power supply board
• Set configuration jumpers
Note: Tighten all screw connections properly; otherwise the EMC behavior
is adversely affected. Complete assembly in reverse order.

7.11 Replacing the µProcessor board
Note: If still possible write down all configuration parameters so that

they can be reentered after the board exchange!

• Remove all external cables
• Losen all screws on the top of the electrnonics
block in order to remove the top cable cover and
the cover of the µP board
• If applicable remove RS232 interface board (op-
tion) to be able to remove the µP board
• Undo all ribbon cable connectors on the µP
board
• Unscrew the 6 fastening screws which fix the
processor board to its metal case
• Configure all jumpers on the new board the same
way (see also board layout in section 10)
• Install new processor board and complete as-
sembly in reverse order.
• Start up the system
• Download the newest firmware for TGA/DSC 1 from the extranet
• Install this firmware with help of the TAServiceTool according to the instruction in section 5
of this service manual
• Check Instruments configuration according to the installed features and the Calib. Number
indicated on Instruments rear side and select the correct settings
Note: Tighten all screws correctly; otherwise the EMC behavior will be
adversely affected.

7.12 SmartSens Terminal

The SmartSens Terminal enables the user to execute certain commands directly at the
Module.
7.12.1 Repair of the SmartSens Terminal

It is not intended to conduct any service or repair work on the SmartSens Terminal.
If the Terminal is defective it must be replaced.
7.12.2 Servicing of the SmartSens Terminal

If you have any problems with the SmartSens Terminal’s sensitivity, contrast, brightness or
color adjust the Terminal by pressing Service / Terminal. Scroll through the menu and per-
form the necessary adjustment. Fur further information please refer to the user manual.
7.12.3 Adjustment and greasing of the terminals support structure

It might be necessary to adjust the movement resistance of the Terminal.
You can adjust the resistance of the

turning of the terminal with help of the
screw on this picture after removing the
counter nut (You need to dismount the
support structure for this). Remount the
counter nut before you install it back on
the housing.
If the SmartSens Terminal squeaks

whilst turning it, grease it with Valvoline
DAB 15.

7.13 Upgrades / Repair Service / RMA

7.13.1 Upgrade from small to large furnace
• Proceed as described in 7.4 (replacing the furnace complete)
• In addition to this do the following:
• Change the configuration to “large furnace”
• If the SDTA-sensor is replaced by a DSC- or DTA-sensor the procedure in section 7.13.2
(upgrade to a different sensor) has to be done
• Create a new module and run a complete calibration
7.13.2 Upgrade to a different sensor

LF and HT instruments can be fitted with different sensors. For DTA- and DSC-sensors the
thermo couple board (beside the analog board) must be present. With an SDTA sensor the
thermo couple board is not used, but it does not hurt if it is.
• If there are doubts whether the thermo couple board is installed this can be checked with
the TAServiceTool (see section 5.4.5)
• Install the thermo couple board if necessary (follow the procedure in section 7.7)
• Adjust the heat flow (see section 8.4.2)
• Change the configuration to the new sensor
• Run all necessary calibrations (TauLag, Temperatures, Heatflow)
• If the baseline of the heatflow signal is outside the tolerance (see logbook) the adjustment
of the reserved parameters (section 8.5) must be done

7.13.3 Procedure for balance repair service

• An original packaging is required including a pallet (halve size). If you do not have a com-
plete original packing please order one.
• The balance for repair consists of the
measuring cell, but without furnace and
sample holder (for details see section 3).
The matched balance electronics must
be included.
• The balance must be packed carefully
according to the description below and
sent back for repair to the address below
(the RMA form must be filled in com-
pletely including the RMA number issued
by TAFPS.Help@mt.com).
• The balance will be checked and repaired (or exchanged).
• The repaired balance will be sent back and invoiced.
• Please store the original packing for the next repair, if it is still useable.
Some important notes:
• Drain the water of the cooling circuit. It is essential to install the transport locking device.
• Instruments need to be carefully packed for export (use original export packing inclusive a
pallet) and the RMA number has to be written in large letters on the outside of the
box.
• Instruments need to be sent preferably by air-freight on CIF/CIP Zurich basis (insurance
should be covered from your warehouse up to our warehouse in Schwerzenbach) and
should be addressed as follows:
Mettler-Toledo AG
Analytical
Technical support MatChar
Sonnenbergstrasse 74
CH-8603 Schwerzenbach
Switzerland
• A proforma Invoice showing quantity and type of instrument(s) and declaring “defective
instrument(s) of SWISS ORIGIN returned for inspection and repair” may accompany the
goods.
• After having inspected the defective instrument(s) you will get an offer / estimate with the
following details:
- Price for labor time and new material
- Charges paid for the import
- Charges up to FOB/FCA Zurich-Airport or CIF/CIP airport of destination (as the case
may be) as well as payment terms, delivery period etc.
• Repair takes place only after having received the RMA form, your firm order and condi-
tions mentioned in our offer / estimate are fulfilled.
Do not send back any items without giving prior notice

to the MatChar Market Support!

7.13.4 RMA Form

It is not allowed to send back any parts to the PO without our acceptance and the required
RMA number issued by us. This acceptance and the RMA number you will get from our hot-
line TAFPS.Help@mt.com.
The RMA form (on the next two pages is a master for copies) must be completed with all
information and packed together with the material.


RETURN MATERIAL AUTHORIZATION

(RMA)
To Be Completed and have RMA # Assigned BEFORE Releasing to Customer
**General information:
This form MUST accompany all returned items. Material will NOT be accepted unless it is accompanied
by an RMA.
Make certain the parts are packed well (Use original packing material if available). Mettler-Toledo, Analytical
is NOT responsible and cannot guarantee that credit will be given for items damaged in transit due to
improper packaging.
Mark RMA# on outside of carton. ** REQUIRED FIELDS
**Shipment information
Shipment to Mettler-Toledo, Analytical, Technical Support MatChar,
Sonnenbergstrasse 74, 8603 Schwerzenbach, Switzerland
**Date of issue
**Issued by
**RMA#
**CUSTOMER INFORMATION:
Company Name
Address
Contact Name
Telephone Number
E-Mail Address
**MATERIAL IS BEING RETURNED OR SHIPPED FOR:

CHECK ONE BELOW
Duplicate Shipment
Over-shipment
Received Damaged
Loaner Being Returned
Rental Being Returned
Wrong Item Received
Return for Repair (Cus-
tomer Cost)
Return for Repair (Un-
der Warranty)
Defective
**DISPOSITION REQUESTED:
Issue Credit to
Customer Repair
Replace at No Charge Exchange for Another
to Customer Item
Other reasons
RMA: MatChar V1.0

**Returned Parts:
**MT PART
NUMBER **QTY **Serial # **Provide your original PO# or Our Invoice#
** Important
The customer is responsible for ensuring the equipment returned to Mettler-Toledo, Analytical
is free of hazardous material. Hazardous material is any material which poses a physical hazard
or health hazard as defined by OSHA Standard 1910.1200. Failure to comply will subject the sender
to processing delays and/or injury claims.
The returned equipment HAS NOT been in contact with hazardous material.
Sender Signature _________________________________________
Phone Number _________________________________________
The returned material HAS been in contact with hazardous material. A MSDS (Material Safety
Data Sheet) is attached for each of the hazardous materials listed below:
Material Name(s) Method of Cleaning Used

___________________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________________
Sender Signature __________________________________________

Phone Number __________________________________________



TGA/DSC 1 Calibration and Adjustment
CONTENTS PAGE
8 Calibration and adjustment ............................................................................... 8-3

8.1 Configurations .................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1 Module parameter overview TGA/DSC 1.............................................................. 8-3
8.1.2 Module parameter configuration ........................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Calibrations......................................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.1 Calibration parameter range ................................................................................. 8-4
8.3 Balance adjustments.......................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.1 Balance adjustment with the internal weights ....................................................... 8-6
8.3.2 Balance adjustment with an external weight......................................................... 8-7
8.3.3 Standard Adjustment (only for service personnel trained on balances) ................ 8-8
8.3.4 Adjustment of the dead load (only for service personnel trained on balances).... 8-9
8.4 Adjustments of the electronics ....................................................................... 8-10
8.4.1 Offset adjustment of the sample and furnace temperature................................. 8-11
8.4.2 Offset adjustment of the heat flow ...................................................................... 8-13
8.5 Adjustment of the reserved parameters ......................................................... 8-14
8.5.1 Determination of the reserved parameters ......................................................... 8-14
8.5.2 Check the baseline ............................................................................................. 8-16
8.6 Limits of error ................................................................................................... 8-17

Calibration and Adjustment TGA/DSC 1

8 Calibration and adjustment

8.1 Configurations
8.1.1 Module parameter overview TGA/DSC 1
Parameter TGA/SF default TGA/LF default TGA/LF/HT default

Furnace control parameter P 25 20 20
Furnace control parameter I 2500 5000 5000
Furnace control parameter D 600 350 350
Reserved parameter 1 0
Dependent on factory settings for DSC and
Reserved parameter 2 0 DTA sensors
Reserved parameter 2 0
Min temp: -50 -50 -50
Max temp: 1200 1200 1700
Balance filter experiment 1 1 1
Balance filter standby 0 0 0
Furnace hold temperature timeout 60 min 60 min 60 min
Attention: The Reserved parameters 1, 2 and 3 are factory set and should not be
changed.
For SDTA Sensors the values are 0. For other sensors the values are
not 0. Please refer to the papers that come with the instrument for the exact
values.
When installing a new DSC- or DTA-sensor into an existing TGA/DSC 1, the
reserved parameters have to be determined, if the drift of the heat flow is too
big (see section 8.5)
8.1.2 Module parameter configuration

There are two different possibilities to configure the TGA/DSC 1 Parameters:
• On the SmartSens Terminal you can enter Service and then select “module setup”. Please
note that the TCP/IP address which is defined there is for information only and does not
change the address on the Ethernet board. For details see section 5.5.3.
• From the TAService Tool you can enter service and then go to “system configuration”. For
details see section 5.4.5.

8.2 Calibrations
• Temperature calibration see STARe software
• TAU lag calibration see STARe software
8.2.1 Calibration parameter range

The table on the next page shows the normal calibration parameter range including default,
maximum and minimum values. These values were taken from up to 10 different instruments
of each type and some tolerance was added. Therefore most instruments in the field should
be in this range. If an instrument is a small amount out of this range, it should not be a prob-
lem. If a parameter is far out of tolerance, you have to check for the reason.
Remember: Only a four or more point calibration will also affect the “C” parameters. If only
two or three points are calibrated, the “C” value is left as it was set before (default value or
value from the CD delivered with the instrument).

Cell temperature (Air, N2)
TGA/DSC 1 SF 1100 °C TGA/DSC 1 LF 1100 °C TGA/DSC 1 LF 1600 °C

A B C A B C A B C
Min
Default
Max
Furnace Tau Lag (Air, N2)

A B C A B C A B C
Min
Default
Max
Sample temperature (for 70 μl Alumina crucible, Air, N2)

A B C A B C A B C
Min
Default
Max
Sample temperature Tau Lag (for 70 μl Alumina crucible, Air, N2)

A B C A B C A B C
Min
Default
Max
These values are not yet available, because they are values by experiences.

8.3 Balance adjustments

The balance in the TGA/DSC 1 is not adjusted automatically during startup of the instrument.
There are different possibilities to adjust the balance. It is important that the balance is stable
(water cooling, protective gas) before starting an adjustment. The internal and external ad-
justments are started from the STARe software on the PC. For the standard adjustment the
balance software “Lars” is required.
The letter C is shown at the bottom right of the module window when an adjustment is going
on.
8.3.1 Balance adjustment with the internal weights

In the module window select “Calib/Adjust” and choose “Balance”. A window pops up. Leave
the selection on Internal and click start.
After the adjustment has finished a message is displayed on the screen and the adjustment
date is written into the “adjustment overview” of the module (STARe SW).

8.3.2 Balance adjustment with an external weight

Same procedure as for the internal calibration. Select External in the pop up window and
enter the weight.
On the TGA/DSC 1-terminal the operator is then asked to put the weight onto the crucible
holder and to remove it again.
After completion the date and the weight are stored in the adjustment overview.

8.3.3 Standard Adjustment (only for service personnel trained on balances)

If there is need to do a standard adjustment this can be done using the balance service soft-
ware LARS.
Preparations / Conditions
• There is no provision for hooking up a balance terminal
• The MX5 / UMX5 are calibrated with a 5 g weight, the MX1 / UMX1 with a 1 g weight. In
the small furnace (SF) there is only room for the 1 g weight.
19200 / 7 / Even / 1 / Hardware / RTS-CTS
Adjustment
• Start LARS
• Open the balance display: Serial port LARS Æ balance display. Move the window to a free
space on the screen. Here you can observe the weight.
• Close the furnace if necessary
• Start the adjustment process: LARS Æ adjustment Æ Cal standard. Type in the precise
weight of the calibration weight.
The internal weights are lowered and lifted again.
• Wait for the weight to stabilize at about 0 g (circle before the weight must disappear).
Open the furnace, put the calibration weight on the sensor and close the furnace again
• Remove the calibration weight after the balance has stabilized (circle disappeared)
• Again the internal weights are lowered and lifted and a message that the adjustment was
successful shows up
• Switch off the module, reconnect the internal serial cable to the balance and turn the mod-
ule on again
• Start an internal calibration from the STARe software (see section 8.3.1)

8.3.4 Adjustment of the dead load

(only for service personnel trained on balances)
Even after the exchange of a sensor there should be no need to readjust the dead
load. The tolerances are quite big. The values deviate from the standard UMX setup.
Preparations / Conditions
• There is no provision for hooking up a balance terminal
19200 / 7 / Even / 1 / Hardware / RTS-CTS
• Refer to the AX/MX/UMX manual for the correct procedure
• The nominal weight of a sensor is 6.74 g. With such a sensor the dead load should be be-
tween -50 mg and +50 mg
• If the weight of a sensor is different, the target for the dead load must be corrected accord-
ingly. (Example: The sensor weighs 6.94 g (+200 mg). So the target for the dead load is
between +150 mg and +250 mg)
Dead load adjustment

• Switch the module off, install the sensor, connect a computer with LARS, switch the mod-
ule on
• Start LARS
• Open the balance display: Serial port LARS Æ balance display. Move the window to a free
space on the screen. Here you can observe the weight.
• Adjust the dead load to the weight which was determined earlier

8.4 Adjustments of the electronics

Perform an offset adjustment after an analog board or heat flow board replacement or if
there are doubts about their proper adjustment.
Attention: Do not tilt or turn the complete instrument. This could damage the bal-
ance seriously! You can either put the instrument on two tables with a
gap in between in order to access the analog board from below or re-
move the balance and tilt the instrument afterwards.
Position of the potentiometers
Position of the service plugs

8.4.1 Offset adjustment of the sample and furnace temperature

• Switch off the instrument
Version “two tables”

• Take out the sample crucible and close
the furnace
• Place the instrument carefully over two
tables with a gap in between in order to
access the analog board from below
• Continue below (common procedure)
Version “Turn to the side”

• Remove the crucibles and the sensor
and install the transport locking device
• Remove the furnace by loosening the
size-4 Allen crew and the knurled red
screw which fix it to the tooth bar and
the guiding bar and lay it beside the
module
• Remove the isolating foam from the bal-
ance
• Disconnect the 2 connectors from the
balance
• Disconnect the furnace driver connector from the power supply
• Remove the two red water hoses connecting to the balance
• Loosen the three size-4 Allen screws, remove the balance and put it gently on a support
that holds it horizontally (the bottom part is not a flat surface)
• Turn the instrument on its left side, being aware of the furnace which is still connected to
the instrument
Common procedure:
Preparation:
• If you use the two service plugs (ME – 51 142 743) you can continue after the drawing
(Adjustment)
• If you do not use the service plugs make the following preparations:
- Remove the 10 nuts (M4) holding the metal cover below the analog board
- Remove the wires from the terminals KL1 and KL2
- Place a jumper wire to each terminal KL1 and KL2 (pin 1 and 3)
- Remove jumper 6

to µProcessor board
to µProcessor board
ST4
KL3
1 1 rd +5.1 V CJ sam ple tem p .
2 bl SG ND
JP9
JP10
123
2468
1357
CJ sam ple tem p . sensor
KL4
1 ye
JP 8 JP 7
JP11
123
2 gn SG ND
321 321
JP12 JP13
Cooling tem p. sensor
KL5
1 ye
12 12 2 gn SG ND
JP6
All cable pairs are twisted

2 4 6
1 3 5
P1 CJ Furnace Furnace
KL7
1 pk
JP 2
ST3 2 gr AG ND
7531
1
8642
1
KL2
2 Furn tem p. sensor
3 AG ND
2 4 6 wt
ANALO G BO ARD JP4

1 3 5
JP 5
bn
Balance
KL8
2 4 6
1 3 5
1
JP1
P2 2
res.
wt
7531
8642
bn
1
Sam ple tem p. sensor
KL1
2
3
AG ND
1 ST11 2 4 6
JP3
KL6
1 3 5 1 rd +5 V CJ furnace tem p.
2 bl -5 V CJ furnace tem p .
1
ST12 gr
1 pk
res.
KL
9
from power supply 2
board
Adjustment:
• Switch the TGA/DSC 1 on an let it stabilize for about 10 min
• Start the TAService Tool (see section 5.4 in this manual) and select “Enter service”
• Select “service software” (2)
• To adjust the furnace temperature
- Select “furnace” (4)
- Select “measure furnace temperature” (1)
- Adjust potentiometer P1 to get an ADC-reading of 0 +/-10 digits.
- Stop the measurement with any key
- Go back one step in the TAService Tool (0)
• To adjust the sample temperature
- select “TGA” (7)
- Select “measure sample temperature” (1)
- Adjust potentiometer P2 to get an ADC-reading of 0 +/-10 digits. You can disregard the
value for Tscj in this case, as the input on the analog board is open. If you run it with the
normal wiring it should read about room temperature
- Stop the measurement with any key
- Select “back” (0) until you get the message “system boot”
• Switch the instrument off and remove the jumper wires from KL1 and KL2.
• If you use the two service plugs, remove them and reconnect the cables
• If you do not use the service plugs:
- Place jumper 6 back
- Connect the wires (white / brown) to the terminals KL1 and KL2 (see section F), watch
the polarity
- Place the cover of the analog board
• Reinstall everything in the reverse order
• End of the offset adjustment

8.4.2 Offset adjustment of the heat flow
C21 C20 C18 JP15 vt

R26 D4 R34 LC1
KL12

C19 R21
C23
R27 D3 R36 R30
R12
D5 R37 R33 LC2
R35
C12 IC5
bk
C26
IC7
ST12 R38 R32
JP17C10 R22 C22 R31 LC3
C6
KL13
IC3
P1
To Balance
C27
R17 R18 R14 R28 LC4 pk
R16 JP14 C2
XL2
JP1 R24 C14 C13 C25
R29
R20
R11
R19 R3
D2
D1
L1
R10
C29 D6 R25 C9
R9
C11
R7
R8
R13 IC6 IC4 R6 R1 gypk
C5
KL14
C1 L2
C3
LBL1 C24
C17 R23 C4 rdbl
C16
Cust,Pacs,Label
C15 C8 C7 R2
R5
IC2 Printed 24x6 R4 L3
R15 JP16
gy
• Proceed as for the adjustments on the analog board (see section 8.3.1)
• Instead of adjusting the furnace or sample temperature do the following to adjust the
heat flow
• If you use the service plugs (ME – 51 142 743) install the one to the balance cable
• If you don’t use the service plugs make the following preparations:
- Remove the wires from pin 1 and 3 of the terminal KL14
- Place a jumper wire between pin 1 and 3 of terminal KL14
• Start the TAService Tool (see section 5.4 in this manual) and select “Enter service”
• Select “service software” (2)
• select “TGA” (7)
• Select “measure DTA temperature” (2)
• Adjust potentiometer P1 to get an ADC-reading of 0 +/-10 digits. You can disregard the
value for Tscj in this case, as the input on the analog board is open. If you run it with the
normal wiring it should read about room temperature
• Stop the measurement with any key
• Select “back” (0) until you get the message “system boot”
• Switch the instrument off
• If you use the service plug reinstall the balance cable
• If you don’t use the service plug:
- Remove the jumper wire from KL14 and reconnect the wires
- Place the cover of the analog board back
• Reinstall everything in the reverse order
• End of the offset adjustment

8.5 Adjustment of the reserved parameters

• The TGA/DSC 1 has the capability of correcting the temperature related drift of the heat
flow
• This is done with the reserved parameters 1 to 3, which are stored into the module’s firm-
ware via the SmartSens Terminal (service password) or the TAServiceTool
• This feature is enabled with DTA and DSC sensors. If all 3 values are set to 0, no correc-
tion takes place
• If the configuration is set to SDTA these values are disregarded (firmware version V 2.04
or higher)
• The values of the reserved parameters depend on the sensor – furnace combination. If a
module was tested in the factory with such a sensor, these values can be found in the pro-
vided paper work and are already stored in the module
• If a new sensor is installed on a TGA/DSC 1 the reserved parameters 1 to 3 have to be
determined and stored in the module firmware
8.5.1 Determination of the reserved parameters

a) Initial measurement
This measurement takes about one hour
• Make sure that the reserved parameters are set to 0
• Run the following experiment:
- TGA-DSC 1 LF Heatflow Drift Adj. for the LF instrument (four temperatures)
- TGA-DSC 1 HT Heatflow Drift Adj. for the HT instrument (five temperatures)
• Conditions:
- Use the gas flows that will be used by the customer later on (Suggestion: 20 ml/min cell
gas, 30 ml/min method gas)
- Use empty reference and sample crucibles
- Remember to switch the settling to “on” for every segment if you create your own
method

b) Evaluation and calculation

• Open the measured curve (it should look similar to the example below)
• Determine the signal values close to the end of each segment (TA / Signal value)
• Open the excel calculation

“Driftcorrection TGA/DSC 1
V1.2.xls”
(to be found on mtaninfo.com)
• Open the correct sheet (LF or HT)
• Put in the found values (blue lines)
• The points should form more or
less a curve (polynomial fit)
• Print this page out for future
reference
• Put the result values into the
module firmware (SmartSens
Terminal or TAServiceTool)

8.5.2 Check the baseline

• Run the following experiment:
- TGA/DSC 1 SF-LF Screen for the LF instrument
- TGA/DSC 1 HT Screen for the HT instrument
• Conditions:
- Use the gas flows that will be used by the customer later on (Suggestion: 20 ml/min cell
gas, 30 ml/min method gas)
- Use empty reference and sample crucibles
• Determine the drift (from start value to minimum or maximum value during the whole ex-
periment, TA / step horizontal)
• For limits see logbook

8.6 Limits of error

See Log Book


TGA/DSC 1 Options and Accessories
CONTENTS PAGE
9 Options and Accessories................................................................................... 9-3

9.1 Sample Robot ME – 51 142 460 ......................................................................... 9-3
9.2 Lid piercing kit ME – 51 119 844...................................................................... 9-27
9.3 Flowmeters........................................................................................................ 9-29
9.4 Gas controller GC10 / GC20 ME – 51 142 672 / 673 ....................................... 9-31
9.5 Gas controller GC100 / GC200 ME – 51 142 670 / 671 ................................... 9-35
9.6 Tubes and fittings............................................................................................. 9-61
9.7 Peripheral control board ME – 00 119 350...................................................... 9-63
9.8 Switched line socket ME – 51 119 682 ............................................................ 9-67
9.9 External power switch ME – 51 119 954 / 955 ................................................ 9-69
9.10 TGA-MS Kit ME – 51 142 405 ........................................................................... 9-71
9.11 TGA-FTIR Kit ME – 51 142 410......................................................................... 9-73
9.12 TGA-FTIR-MS-Kit ME – 51 142 405 .................................................................. 9-75
9.13 TGA-Sorption Kit ME – 51 142 379 .................................................................. 9-77
9.14 Accessories ...................................................................................................... 9-79

Options and Accessories TGA/DSC 1

9 Options and Accessories

9.1 Sample Robot ME – 51 142 460
9.1.1 Converting the TGA/DSC 1 for the sample robot
Requirements
• Sample robot conversion kit ME – 51 142 449 for TGA/DSC 1
• Sample robot complete ME – 51 142 460
These two kits are shipped in one box and contain all the parts necessary to convert the
TGA/DSC 1 and to install the whole sample robot.
Robot conversion kit (TGA/DSC 1-specific parts)

1 Left front housing ME – 51 142 656 B 3)
2 2 screws for bracket mounting M5 x 22 (ME – 51 195 522) B 2)
3 Sample turntable U1 (TGA) for 34 crucibles ME – 51 140 402 A 2)
4 Screw for housing (ME – 51 195 517) B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

Converting the TGA/DSC 1

• Remove all housings
• Remove the sensor (if installed)
• Remove the furnace (2 screws) and lay it
on its side. 3
• Remove the mounting bracket
(2 screws)
• Remove the two leftmost 10mm hexagon 2
head screws fixing the chassis to the
front module (they would be in the way of
the robot lift)
• Remove the shield between the µProces-
sor board and the Power supply board .
• Mount the mounting bracket with two

screws from the robot conversion kit to
the robot lift base 4
• Mount the robot lift with 3 screws from the
robot conversion kit and the 2 screws
from the mounting bracket. Note that one
of them is used in a different position than
before
Move this screw to

here

9.1.2 Installation of the sample robot

Note: Some of the following pictures are from a DSC 1 if the procedures are the same as for
the TGA/DSC 1.
Mounting of the robot support plate

1
• Mount the robot support plate to the tele-
scope
• turn the guiding bolt out by about 3 mm
• Push the telescope and the guide into the
robot lift base until the telescope is level
with the lower end of the fixture
• Install the 3 screws and nuts and tighten
them quite hard
• Pre-adjust the distance between the lower
end of the base and the upper surface of 2
the platform to 214 mm ±1 mm (the fine
adjustment will be done later)
214 +/-1 mm
5
• Remove the outer and the inner housing of the sample robot
• remove the transportation padding (foam) in the top section

Mounting of the robot
(the pictures below are from a DSC 1, but the procedure is the same for the TGA/DSC 1)
Mount the sample robot onto the sup-

port plate with the 3 Torx T20 screws
(the shape of your sample support

plate might differ from the one in the
picture)
Remove the shield between the

µProcessor and the Power supply
board (if not yet done) and install the
shield onto which the black sample
robot cable is already mounted
Install the cable clip
Install the ribbon cable ST 14 to the

Power supply board(connector at the
top)
Unscrew the µProcessor module and
disconnect ST 4 that you are able to
lift it to guide the sample robot ribbon
cable ST 5 underneath it
Connect the sample robot ribbon ca-
ble ST 5 (the lowermost as indicated
with the finger on the picture)
Reconnect ST 5
Remount the 4 screws of the µProc-

essor module.
Reinstall all the covers of the elec-

tronics modules

Robot height fine adjustment
Mount the rear housing and the left

front housing (robot version)
These two housings are used as a

reference in order to adjust the sample
robot height
Move the cover over the sample robot

(The sample robot cover fits very
tightly)
Guide the back of the cover into the

rectangular opening of the metal robot
cover
Guide it down over the sample turnta-

ble
Tighten it provisorily with the 4 T20

Torx screws (2 from the top, 2 from
underneath
This height adjustment ring is used to

fine adjust the height of the whole
sample robot

The robot support plate must rest di-

rectly on the height adjustment ring
There must be no gap between robot

support plate and height adjustment
ring, otherwise the robot rests on the
housing below and that would interfere
with the future adjustments
Adjust the height adjustment ring in a

1 way that you have a small gap be-
tween the left front housing and the
sample robot cover.
Make sure that the rear housing and
the sample robot cover are level (to
make it look decent)
Remove the sample robot cover and

the instrument housings

Adjustment of the mechanical stop
Open the furnace manually
Install the sensor
Check that the sample holder is hori-

zontal. Carefully bend it if necessary
(only SDTA sensors)
Loosen the mechanical stop on the

sample robots vertical drive
Shift down carefully the vertical drive

until the gripper nearly touches the
sample holder (it should have a gap of
approximately 0.2mm between gripper
and sample holder). Make sure that
the fingers do not interfere with the
wires coming from the sample holder.
Hold it at this position and push up the

mechanical stop ring to the motor
support plate and tighten it with the
screw

Adjustment of the pan position
Place a sample turntable onto the

sample robot
Place a dummy pan in position one
Place the green dummy pan with help

of the gripper onto the TGA/DSC 1
sensor (by manually turning the cog
wheels)
Lift the robot, turn it to the side and

check the position of the dummy pan
on the sensor

The dummy pan should be nicely cen-

tered on the sample holder (prede-
fined area)
If this is not the case, remove the

dummy pan with the robot and adjust
the position as described below
Change the position of the sample

robot with help of the three Torx T25
screws
Repeat the procedure above to put the

dummy pan onto the sensor
If you are satisfied with the position of

the dummy pan on the sensor, fix the
three screws permanently
Install all the instrument housings and also the sample robot cover.
Align the robot cover nicely with the instruments housings and tighten all four T20 Torx
screws (2 of them from underneath)
Do not mount the inner and outer robot housings yet

9.1.3 Fine adjustment of the sample robot

• Do the fine adjustment of the sample robot according to the instruction given on the
SmartSens terminal (see 5.5.2)
• For this adjustment you need the green ‘Dummy pan’ used for DSC 1 and TGA/DSC 1
and the ’Gauge block’ and ‘Centering ring for TGA’ listed in section 3 of this Service
manual.
• Do a fine adjustment of the X/Y sample robot position if necessary
• If everything is completed successfully mount the inner and outer sample robot housings
The Sample robot is now ready for being used by the customer

9.1.4 Spare parts / Service Tools

Exploded view drawing

Spare parts list sample robot

1 Motor complete (current controlled version, 11.5 Ω), ME – 51 141 554 A 2)
(used for gripper and lifter)
2 Gear wheel complete (ME – 51 142 456) B 2)
3 Code disk (with one slit and mechanical stop) Order via Hotline B 2)
4 Connection cable to µProcessor and power supply ME – 51 142 099 A 2)
(Ribbon cable with shield (round)
5 Lifter board ME – 00 119 365 A 4)
6 Sample turntable board ME –51 150 015 A 2)
7 Motor complete (voltage controlled version, 460 Ω), ME – 00 119 262 A 2)
(used for the turntable)
8 Sample monitoring board ME – 51 150 014 A 2)
9 Sample robot logic board ME – 51 141 498 A 2)
10 Internal connection ribbon cable Order via Hotline B 2)
11 Universal gripper ME – 51 119 970 A 2)
12 Gripper board ME – 00 119 371 A 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

9.1.5 Theory of operation

Function description of the sample robot
The sample robot is an automatic sample changer for the excellence line systems. It can load
the appropriate cells with up to 34 samples.
The three axles, gripper, lifter and sample turntable are driven by stepper motors. The elec-
tronic control signals are generated and evaluated on the controller board of the cell (e.g.
DSC 1). The supply voltages +5 V and +24 V are supplied by the power supply of the meas-
uring cell. The sample robot electronics are connected by a ribbon cable to the correspond-
ing board of the module.
Mechanical layout
The sample robot comprises the following components:
• Robot lift base with telescope
• Base plate
• Sample turntable drive
• Lifter drive
• Gripper drive
• Housing, top cover and cover

9.1.6 Error Messages / Trouble shooting

Error messages and warnings
Error codes
ERROR 3415 See Error Messages and warnings in section 5
ERROR 50 See Error Messages and warnings in section 5

ERROR 50XX
Warnings
WARNING 8 “No crucible in gripper”
• The light barrier could not detect a crucible although one was expected.
• Check whether crucible is present.
WARNING 9 “Crucible in gripper”

• The light barrier detects a crucible although none was expected.
• See warning 8.
WARNING 10 “Cover of the sample changer not mounted”

• Mount cover.
• Mechanical check on switch.
WARNING 11 “Sample changer not connected”

• Plug in both ribbon cables.
WARNING 12 “Crucible monitoring faulty”
WARNING 81 “Sample changer not installed”

• The sample robot is installed at the cell, but not in the STARe Software.
• Perform installation in the STARe Software.
Malfunction without error message

“The gripper is below the sample turntable and they interfere with each other.
• Switch the module off, lift the gripper manually and restart the module
• Adjust the gripper if necessary.

9.1.7 Maintenance
Checklist Maintenance
Maintenance of the sample robot comprises a visual inspection, lubrication and a function
check.
Visual inspection
Check external condition of the following components:
• Gripper
• Sample turntable
• Cover
Lubrication
Lubricate the robot according to the table in section 3.4.5.
Function check
• Switch on the module. The sample robot must initialize, i.e. all axles must move to their
reference position
• Dummy pan is placed in the correct position on the sample turntable (sample robot ad-
justment)
• Check functions with the sample robot test with the onboard or terminal service mode as
described in section 5 of this manual
Supply voltages on the sample robot control board

5 VDC TP3 (GND TP4)
24 VDC TP1 (GND TP2)

9.1.8 Replacement and repair of sample robot components

Replacement of the sample robot logic board
• Unscrew cover.
• Disconnect the three ribbon cable connectors.
• Unscrew rear panel.
• Unscrew sample robot logic board.
• Installation in reverse order.
Replacement of the Gripper board

• Unscrew cover.
• Disconnect gripper and motor connectors.
• Remove rear panel.
• Unscrew gripper board.
• Installation in reverse order.
Replacement of the Gripper motor

• Unscrew cover.
• Disconnect motor connector.
• Screw new motor on loosely. Adjust meshing of the gear wheels to be virtually free from
play and then screw tight.
• Plug in motor connector, screw on cover.

Replacement of the gripper

• Remove the defective universal gripper with help of the
screw (normally visible from the front side)
• Mount the new gripper with help of the assembly tool
(ME – 51 140 510) to the lifting rod. The fixing screw is
positioned to the front (tighten provisionally)
• Push the lifting rod back up
• Place the sample turntable
here
Gripper mounting (screw in front)
• Twist the turntable until the fingers are above

a sample position of the turntable
• Manually turn the gear wheels of the stepper motor to
position the gripper (opened to his maximum) onto the
grooves of the turntable
• Rotate the gripper to get the fingers aligned with the
grooves
• Check the fingers are still opened to the maximum
• Tighten the fixing screw from the universal gripper
• Perform gripper adjustment (see gripper adjustment)

Replacement of the Lifter board

• Unscrew cover
• Disconnect both connectors
• Change lifter board
• Plug in both connectors, mount cover
Replacement of the Lifter motor

• Unscrew cover
• Disconnect the three ribbon cable connectors
• Unscrew rear panel
• Disconnect motor connector
• Screw on new motor loosely. Adjust meshing of the gear wheels to be virtually free from
play and then screw tight
• Plug in motor connector, screw on cover
Replacement of the Sample turntable board or sample monitoring board

• Unscrew housing
• Disconnect ribbon cable connector and motor connector
• Change turntable board
• For the sample monitoring board, unscrew cover
• Disconnect ribbon cable connector
• Change sample monitoring board
Replacement of the Gear wheel, complete

• Unscrew cover
• Remove motor
• Unscrew hex setscrew and take out gear wheel
• Installation in reverse order
Replacement of the Gear wheel

• Remove locking ring at the end of the bearing
• Move turntable upward
• Unscrew countersunk screws and by gently turning the gear wheel carefully remove it from
the shaft
• Install new gear wheel, center on the holes and screw on
• Insert turntable in bearing and fasten with locking ring

Replacement of the Ribbon cable

• Unscrew housing
• Unscrew cover
• Pull cable off the sample robot logic board
• Unscrew socket from base plate
• Take ribbon cable out of socket and support
• Bend new cable to the same shape as old cable
• Insert new ribbon cable through socket and support
• Lead all cables at the end of the socket through the slot and screw socket to the base
plate
Note: Socket must be adjusted using the tool ME – 00 119 474. (see section 3)
• Plug in all ribbon cables
• Mount housing and cover

9.1.9 Adjustment and calibration

Gripper adjustment
• Make sure the gripper is adjusted to the sample plate (see gripper replacement)
• Switch on the instrument, the stepper motor goes into a defined position
• Disconnect the connector of the gripper motor
• Loosen the code disk
• Adjust the gear wheel so that the gripper is exactly in its
maximum open position
• Check the vertical position of the gear wheel to the cog
wheel of the stepper motor. It should be about in the mid-
dle
• Rotate the code disc until the slit is detected by the light
barrier. Tighten the screw . Make sure there is a little ver-
tical play (place a small piece of paper between the
washer and the code disc)
• Check the position of the gripper, the cams and the code
disc. Repeat the adjustments described above if neces- Gear wheel
sary
• Reconnect the connector of the gripper motor Code disk
• Move the gear wheel forth and back within its position (us-
ing the play) and make sure that the “Gripper open LED”
Safety stop
always stays on. If not, loosen the screw of the code disk
and turn it slightly
• Lubricate the cam with Valvoline if necessary, use Mo-
lykote for the tooth bar
• Check the position of the safety stop.
• Check the robot for smooth movements on all axes

Pan recognition light barrier adjustment

• Perform the pan detection test which is part of the sample
Potentiometer
robot test (see in section 5 of this manual). R8
• Note: Check pan recognition Range: 32 ±4 steps
Potentiometer position on the board
• If it is not within the recognition range, the potentiometer

must be adjusted.
• You need to take the robot housing off in order to reach Potentiometer R8
9.1.10 Drawings
Block diagram

Sample robot logic board

Layout
ST 14
D6 +5 V
IC 16
+5 VS
D15
IC 13
IC 12
ST
IC 15 24
IC 11 IC 14
D3 +24 V
D2 Lifter in top position
D1 Turntable in 0 - position
D3 Gripper in open position
D18 Crucible
ST 5
D8 Cover on

Gripper board
IC 1
LC 4
LC 3
ST 2
ST 1 (G 1) LC 2
LC 1
Layout of gripper board
Lifter board
ST 1 (L 1) ST 2
LC 4
LC 2
LC 1
LC 3
IC 1
Layout of lifter board

Sample turntable board
ST1
ERDE2
IC1
ERDE
ST2
Layout of sample turntable board
Sample monitoring board
Layout of sample monitoring board

9.2 Lid piercing kit ME – 51 119 844

Parts included in the kit:
• Crucible opener (see picture) ME – 51 119 911 B
• Needle set: ME – 51 119 886 A
- 3 Needles 0.1 mm diameter
- 1 Needle 0.7 mm diameter
- 1 needle 1.0 mm diameter
• 1 gauge block for 1,2,3 gripper ME – 51 119 878 A
• 1 gauge block for universal gripper ME – 51 140 406 A
• 1 Screw M2 x 3 ME – 00 076 304 B
• 1 Plunger for crucible sealing press ME – 00 027 386 A
• 1 set of 400 piercing lids ME – 51 119 873 A
9.2.1 Installation:
• Fix the crucible opener on the required needle according
to the picture. Attention for the 0.5 mm for an uncom-
pressed spring.
• Insert the complete crucible opener into the sample robot
• Adjust the distance between the gripper finger ends and
the needlepoint with help of the attached gauge block.
• Fix the crucible opener on the Sample robot with help of
the M2 screw (Attention: do not loose the small screw!).
0.5 mm
Piercing lid Gauge block Crucible opener with needle


9.3 Flowmeters
9.3.1 Flowmeter 26 – 266 ml / min (for DSC dry gas) ME – 51 141 999
This flowmeter is used for DSC dry gas with 200 ml/min.
9.3.2 Flowmeter 5 – 54 ml / min (for DSC and TGA) ME – 51 142 725

This flow meter is used for DSC and TGA cell and method gas with customer required flow
and also for TGA balance protective gas with 20 ml/min.


9.4 Gas controller GC10 / GC20 ME – 51 142 672 / 673

9.4.1 One channel version GC10 (TSO800GC1) ME – 51 142 672
1 1
2 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
TP7
TP8
IC7 IC6
TP5 TP6 TP3TP2
9 9
10 10
11 11

9.4.2
4.2 Two channel version GC20 (TSO800GC) ME – 51 142 673
1 1
2 3
4 4
5 5
TP7
6 TP8 6
7 7
IC IC
7 6
8
TP5 TP6 TP3TP2
9 9
10 10
11 11

9.4.3 Link settings and test points

Gas Controller Link TP2-TP3 IC6 IC7
1 Channel gas controller YES YES NO
2 Channel gas controller NO YES YES
Test Point Signal

TP 0 AGND
TP 1 Reference Voltage +5 V
TP 2 Signal channel 1 / 0…5 V
TP 3 Signal channel 2 / 0…5 V
TP 4 Gas flow out
TP 5 DGND
TP 6 +5 V
TP 7 +15 V
TP 8 -15 V
9.4.4 Spare parts list for both versions

Item Part description 1 2 3 4 Part number A/B*
1 Tubing connector LW4 ME – 51 190 324 A 2)
2 Valve control cable ME – 00 119 316 A 2)
3 Gas flow control cable ME – 00 119 317 A 2)
4 Coupling part LW4 (ME – 51 190 323) B 2)
5 Valve complete (rear side) ME – 00 119 318 A 2)
6 Tubes ME – 00 070 874 A 3)
7 Gas flow sensor ME – 00 190 004 A 3)
8 Gas flow board ME – 51 650 090 A 2)
9 Valve complete (front) ME – 00 119 047 A 2)
10 Rotary knob (ME – 00 071 940) B 3)
11 Cover rotary knob (ME – 00 071 941) B 3)
— Peripheral board ME – 00 119 350 A 2)
— 1 Channel gas controller ME – 51 119 597 A 1)2)
— 2 Channel gas controller ME – 00 119 035 A 1)2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)


9.5 Gas controller GC100 / GC200 ME – 51 142 670 / 671

9.5.1 Cautionary Notes
In maintenance and service work on the Gas Controller, it is essential to comply with the fol-
lowing cautionary notes.
• Service work may be performed only by engineers who have attended a training course
specified to the product. Service documentation will be distributed only to trained engi-
neers.
•
• Before opening the instrument all power and serial connectors as well as all gas hoses
must be unplugged.
•
• Plug or unplug connectors on the internal PCB’s only when the instrument is switched off.
9.5.2 Spare Parts List
Item Part description 1 2 3 4 Part number Mettler P/N A/B*

1 Controller board 0402001.03 (GC100) 0401901-GC100 ME – 51 191 836 A 2)
2 Controller board 0402001.03 (GC200) 0401901-GC200 ME – 51 191 892 A 2)
3 RS-232 board 0402002.02 (incl. cable) 0402902 ME – 51 191 837 A 2)
4 Set of fittings (Serto) ME – 51 142 749 A 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

9.5.3 Layout Gas Controller

Proportional valve Power Switch
3/2-way valve
Flow sensor RS-232 board
Manifold
Controller board

9.5.4 GC100 / GC200
The gas controller comes in two different versions:
• 4 inputs and 1 output (1 channel) GC100
• 4 inputs and 2 outputs(2 channels) GC200

9.5.5 Troubleshooting
Measurement Points
Test Point Specified Value Tolerance Remarks

TP5 0V Ground
TP8 + 5.1 V ± 102 mV Relative to TP5
TP9 + 24 V ± 1200 mV Relative to TP5
TP6 + 15 V ± 300 mV Relative to TP5
TP4 +5V ± 50 mV Relative to TP5
TP7 +5V ± 50 mV Relative to TP5
TP8
TP9
TP6
TP7
TP4
TP5

Troubleshooting
Fault Description Possible cause Rectification

Gas Controller does not function at all No power supply Connect the Gas Controller power
adapter to the power line and the
instrument and switch on the Gas
Controller
Controller board broken Replace controller board

No response from the Gas Controller No serial connection present Connect a serial cable
with serial connection
RS-232 board broken Replace the RS-232 board
Controller board broken Replace controller board

Cannot switch to another gas Check the gas connection Connect the gas
Check the gas pressure Adjust the pressure
Check if you hear the selection valve Replace the selection valve
click on selection
No gas flow Check the gas connection Connect the gas
Check the gas pressure Adjust the pressure
Check if you get a Replace the proportional valve

“Warning_flow_out_of_range”
Check the set value Adjust the set value
Check the flow Replace the flow sensor

Recalibrate the channel

9.5.6 Error Messages
Error Message Possible cause Rectification

ERR_SYSTEM_INITIALISATION System could not be initialized Restart the system
Replace the controller board
ERR_HARDWARE Vcc Internal hardware Vcc value out of Replace the controller board
range
ERR_HARDWARE 24 V Internal hardware 24 V value out of Replace the controller board
range
ERR_HARDWARE Ambient Temp Ambient Temperature Let the instrument cool down and re-
out of range start the system and check the ambient
temperature.
Replace the controller board

9.5.7 Repair
Removing the Cover
Warning: Remove all connectors and hoses on the rear side of the instrument be-
fore opening
• Unscrew the screws on the bottom side of the instrument (1)

•
• Unscrew the screws on the rear side of the instrument (2)

Replacing the Controller Board

• Transfer all connections to the new controller board
• Make sure all connections correspond with the text on the printed circuit board (PCB)
• Unscrew the four screws on the corners of the PCB
• Replace the controller board and screw the four screws on the corners of the PCB back in
Top view GC100 Controller Board
Top view GC200 Controller Board

Replacing the RS-232 Board
• Unplug the RS-232 board flat cable from the controller board
Unplug the flat cable
• Unscrew the four sub-D screws on the rear side of the instrument
• Replace the RS-232 board and screw the sub-D screws on the rear side back in
Sub-D screws

9.5.8 Service Software
Gas controller Service Tool
A special software service tool, Gas controller Service Tool (GST), has been developed for
servicing the Mettler Toledo Gas controller.
• Connect the Gas controller to the computer through the RS-232 master (without the
small NULL MODEM adapter) or via the USB output.
• Switch on the instrument
• Start the software by double clicking the “GST Version 1.7.exe” file which is available on
the extranet
The handles to the different functional options are situated on the right hand side of the win-
dow. Scrolling over them with the mouse will light them up and enable them for activation.

Flow Control Menu
In this menu it is possible to monitor the real time flow measured by the instrument.
In Idle state the flow value is 0.00 ml/min.
Open the Set Value dialog box of the specified channel
Close the dialog box

• Select the calibration gas connected

• Select the input the calibration gas is connected to
• Set the target flow value
• Activate the flow control and close the dialog box by clicking

Calibration Menu
In this menu a list of all installed calibration gasses is displayed.

N_2_cal is the factory default calibration gas.
Add a new calibration gas.
Delete a calibration gas
Channel not calibrated for this gas.

Click to calibrate the channel for this gas.
Channel calibrated for this gas.

Click to recalibrate the channel for this gas.
Close the dialog box

Add a calibration gas
• To add a calibration gas click
• Enter a gas name and its specific physical parameter

• Store the data in the instrument and close the box by clicking

• It is very important that you use the gas parameters which are given in the gas tab in
the STARe software install window. Otherwise the STARe software will not recognize the
gas later and uses the standard gas N2 instead.

Delete a calibration gas
• To delete a calibration gas click

Calibrate a channel
In calibration mode, the instrument will control 5 different flows which are to be measured by
an external calibrator (Flow meter). After entering these 5 measured flows, the instrument
will start an automatic calculation in which the relationship between the entered flow and the
internal measured flow sensor voltage is retrieved.
This procedure is to be repeated for every channel (channel in this case stands for output).
Warning: After calibration, the previous data is lost. It is therefore not possible to
roll back to a previous calibration.
• Connect the calibration gas to the desired input

• Connect the external calibration device to the corresponding calibration channel output
N2
Gasbox
84,23 ml/min
Flow-meter

• To start the calibration click or of the target gas and channel

•
• When calibrating channel 1 (which has multiple inputs), select the input the calibration gas
is connected to
•
• To start the calibration procedure click

The first value will be controlled by the Gas controller. This value can now be measured with
an external flow meter.
Though the flow output value of the Gas controller is within 90% of its set value within
0.5 seconds, the calibration procedure imposes a stabilization time of 5 seconds before ena-
bling the edit box for entering the measured value
• Enter the measured value in ml/min and click
• Repeat this step until the channel is calibrated

9.5.9 Edit Serial Number
This menu enables the user to edit the instrument’s serial number.
Warning: Because the serial number of the instrument also relates to the internal
hardware, editing is only allowed after changing the controller board.
• Edit the serial number
• Store the serial number in the instrument and close the dialog box by clicking

9.5.10 Restore Factory Defaults
This menu can be used to restore the factory default values of the instrument.
Warning: Restoring the default values will result in deletion of all added calibration
gasses and values.
• Restore the default factory settings and close the dialog box by clicking

9.5.11 Upload a new firmware to the gas controller

• Download the required firmware from the Extranet (e.g. Gas Controller EmbSW V2.3) and
store it onto the hard disk. Make sure to load the newest version.
• In order to upload the above mentioned file you need to download the flashloader for Gas
Controller as well and store it onto the hard disk. The file needs to be unzipped, it will be
unzipped to three disks. The setup exe file to install the flashloader is on disk 1.
• Start the flashloader (Go to start program)
• You will get the following error message
• This is normal as the Gas Controller is not yet in the boot modus where you can upload
the firmware. Clear this error message by pressing OK.
• The following screen will be shown:

Connect the Gas controller to your computer using a standard RS-232 cable (without the
small NULL MODEM adapter) or by using a USB cable.
• In order to bring the gas controller into boot modus you need to press the very small white
button while switching the gas controller on. Marked by the red circle in the picture below:
• Press Reload Monitor, the monitor signal turns green afterwards.

• Go to Config / Serial Port configuration
• Under file to program choose the file which needs to be uploaded (Where it’s currently
showing NONE Nohexfile loaded, no info)
• Choose 57600 as the baud rate / click onto Save as default / click onto Apply
• Click on Program and Verify
• If the programming was successful you will get the message PROGRAM FLASH
MEMORY
-- OK:
• Close the flashloader software.

• Switch the gas controller off and on again to bring it form boot modus back into normal
operating mode.
• To prove if the new software has been loaded start the Gas Controller Service Tool (GST)
(see section 9.4.8) software. Check if the software recognizes the Gas Controller and if it
is displaying the correct firmware version.
• Alternatively you can check the firmware after reconnecting the Gas Controller to the TA
instrument (Do not forget to reconnect the NULL MODEM adapter) with help of the
SmartSens Terminal by pressing SETUP / SYSTEM INFO and scrolling down to the last
page, the Gas Controller will be shown and the software version of the gas controller will
be shown as well.

9.6 Tubes and fittings

9.6.1 Tubing Set (ME – 51 142 696)

1 Black tubing, polyurethane (5 m) (ME – 51 190 781) B 2)
2 Reduction piece, polyurethane (ME – 51 191 881) B 3)
3 Plug, polyamide (ME – 51 191 767) B 2)
4 Y-piece, polypropylene (ME – 51 190 109) B 2)
5 Clamp ring, polyamide (ME – 51 191 882) B 3)
6 Pipe fitting, polyamide (ME – 51 191 766 A 2) 3)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

9.6.2 Steel Fittings (ME – 51 142 811, ME – 51 142 812 and ME _ 51 142 813)
for DSC 1, DSC/TGA 1, Flow meters and Gas Controllers
The gray polyamide fittings can be replaced by fittings made

of stainless steel (1.4571, DIN 17440 ≈316 Ti). Depending
on the set-up you have to order different numbers of fittings,
ferrules and plugs. To make it a little bit easier for you we
made three new "Gas adapter union set's" (see below)
which are available from stock.
ME – 51 142 811 Gas adapter union Set 1 (steel)

Male adapter union 2 pcs
Compression ferrule 2 pcs
ME – 51 142 812 Gas adapter union Set 2 (steel)

Plug* (steel) 1 pc
ME _ 51 142 813 Gas adapter union Set 3 (steel)

Plug* (steel) 2 pcs
* only needed for TGA
Overview of connectors (DSC 1 and TGA/DSC 1)
Instrument type DSC 1 TGA/DSC 1
3: purge, protective and reactive

Number of connectors 2: purge and dry gas
gas
Connection thread G1/8“
Pipe diameter nominal size 1/8“ (3.18 mm)
Number of connectors Flow meter 2: (1 in, 1 out) 2: (1 in, 1 out)
GC10 3: (2 In, 1 Out)

GC20 Number of 4: (2 In, 2 Out)
GC100connectors 5: (4 In, 1 Out)
GC200 6: (4 In, 2 Out)

9.7 Peripheral control board ME – 00 119 350

9.7.1 Installation
• Perform partial disassembly of the rear side housing (see section 7).
• Open the power supply box.
• Connect the ribbon cable to the connector ST21 on the power supply board
(see section 10).
• Mount the peripheral control board into the guide inside of the power supply box and fix it
with the two screws from the rear side of the instrument.
• Cut out the black foil above the three connection sockets on the rear side.
• Close the instrument in reverse order.
• Check the required functions

LP 1
9-64
1 +15 V +6.3 VREF
2 -15 V
3 +5 V
AGND
4 +6.3 VREF KU 3
5
KU 3
AGND
4 COOLER LEVEL +
6 VALVE 1
7 DAC 1 COOLER CONTROL +
N2 LEVEL OK
8 VALVE 2
9 GND
10 D0-C
11 D1-C 3 COOLER LEVEL -
12
Options and Accessories
D2-C COOLER CONTROL-

9.7.2 Schematic
2
13 D3-C
14 D4-C 5 LP 2
15 D5-C +24 V +24 V
16 D6-C 6
17 VALVE 1 +24 V GNDS2 GNDS2
D7-C
18 GND 8
DGND EARTH
19 PGND 9
KU 2
KU21
20 PGND PGND 7 PGND
21 +24 V 1 +24 V
22 +24 V
+24 V
23 DGND
24 SYNC IN
KU 1
25 SINC OUT
1 +24 V
26 DGND 4 VALVE 1
27 DGND
28 DGND
29 +5 V
10/2009
2 SYNC SUPPLY
30 +5 V
31 VAR. DET. 2
32 VAR. DET. 1
33 NC DGND PGND
+24 V
34 NC
+5 V VALVE 2
PGND PGND
3 +24 V
U m ax 30 V
4
5 VALVE2
+5 V 7 2 NC
8
6
EARTH
5 7
DGND
DGND PGND
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF: BY ACCEPTANCE OF
SINC OUT
METTLER THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO PUBLISH
6 THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE THEM AVAILABLE
TOLEDO TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION, NOR TO USE IT FOR
CH-8606 Greifensee ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED TO HIM.
PERIPHERAL CONTROL BOARD ES - 00 119 350

DGND
Sheet 1/1
TGA/DSC 1
Service Manual ME-51710474B

TGA/DSC 1
9.7.3 Layout

from power
supply board
10/2009
KU21
1
1
ST1 R21 R22
Cooling control 1
ST2
KU3 R23 R24
level detection LP2 LP1
Valve
KU2
PERIPHERAL CONTROL BOARD
Synch. IN/OUT
KU1
Options and Accessories
9-65
9.7.4
4 Connections
KU21 To Power Supply Board KU1 Sync. IN/OUT
1 +15V 1 +24 V
2 -15V 2 Sync Supply view outside
3 AGND 3 Sycn IN+
4 5
4 +6.3VREF 4 Sync IN-
7
5 AGND 5 Sync OUT 8
3 6
6 VALVE1 6 Sync OUT 2

1
7 N2 LEVEL OK 7
Earth
8 VALVE2 8
9 GND
10 D0
11 D1
KU2 VALVE
12 D2
13 D3 1 +24 V view outside
14 D4 2 NC
3
15 D5 3 +24 V 5
6
D6 Valve1 2
16 4 7
4
17 D7 5 Valve2 1
GND 6
18 Earth
PGND 7
19
20 PGND
21 +24V
22 +24V
KU3 Cooling control
23 DGND
24 SYNCIN 1 Cooler Contr.+
25 SYNCOUT 2 Cooler Contr.- view outside
26 DGND 3 Cooler Level-
27 DGND 4 Cooler Level+ 3
5 7
28 DGND 5 8
+24 V 9 2
6
29 +5V 6
4 1
30 +5V 7 PGND
31 VAR DET2 8
Earth
32 VAR DET1 9
33 NC
34 NC
VAR1 VAR2 VAR3 LP1 LP2 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
R21 X - X open open 0.....10.1 V
R22 - X - closed open -5.06 V.....+5.06 V
R23 - X X open closed prohibited

R24 X - - closed closed -10.1 V.....+10.1 V

9.8 Switched line socket ME – 51 119 682

9.8.1 Installation
• Perform partial disassembly of the rear side housing (see section 7).
• Disconnect the cable connection between line module and power supply.
• Open the line module with help of the four screws on the top.
• Disconnect the connection to the furnace power amplifier (on the rear top).
• Disconnect the connection to the power supply module
• Unscrew the line module and remove it (remove two screws on the rear bottom and loosen
two screws on the front bottom).
• Install the switched line socket printed circuit board with help of the two screws in the line
module (correct position see section 10, line module).
• Change the wiring from power inlet to the line socket from direct wiring to switched wiring.
Use the black wires for AP2 and AP 4 (line) and the blue wires for AP1 and AP3 (neutral).
• Feed the control cable through the hole on the front side of the line module and connect it
to the control inputs (AP5 and AP6) of switched line socket printed circuit board. Make
sure, that the red wire (+24 V) is connected to AP5; otherwise you will damage the power
supply board.
• Install the shield to the corresponding bolt.
• Fix the cable to the bolt which is located next to the front side hole.
• Reinstall the line module in the reverse order.
• Install the other end of control coble to connector ST1 pins 12 to 14 (see section 10, wiring
of line module).
• Check the position of the red wire. In connected state it must be on the top one of the
three wires.
• Close the instrument and check the functions.
9.8.2 Switched line socket PC -– board (ES – 51 119 658)
AP2 AP1 AP4 AP3

AP4 L AP2 R AP1
AP3 N
E
1
RE1
AP5
AP6
D1
+ 24 V
AP5 AP6
Schematic of switched line socket board Switched line socket printed circuit board


9.9 External power switch ME – 51 119 954 / 955

External power switch 230 V / 16 A Version ME – 51 119 954
External power switch 115 V / 25 A Version ME – 51 119 955
9.9.1 Requirements
For using the external power switch, the switched line socket option is required.
9.9.2 Installation
• The control cable delivered together with the power switch must be connected to the
power switch relay according to the drawing below.
• On the other end of that cable the instrument connector (delivered together with each
module) to the switched line output socket must be connected.
• For the power switched cable (from mains supply through the line switch to the Intracooler
connector) a country specific extension cord* with the required length can be used.
• Cut that extension cord on the required position and wire it through the power switch ac-
cording to the wiring diagram below.
* This is not part of the delivery of the production organization
9.9.3 Wiring diagram
from switched
line socket
yellow / green = earth
blue = neutral
brown = line blue
neutral and line could be country specific brown
NC yellow / green
NC
NC Instrument connector
from mains (delivered with each module)
supply line NC
to Intracooler
blue NC
blue
brown
brown
yellow / green
yellow / green
country specific
line connector country specific
line socket
Connection and wiring diagram of the external power switch


9.10 TGA-MS Kit ME – 51 142 405
13 7 6 5 4 3 2 10 1
17 18 15 8 14 12 11 16


1 Connecting flange (ME – 51 142 406) B 2)
2 O-Ring 9 x 2 (ME – 51 191 724) B 3)
3 Compression sleeve (ME – 51 142 409) B 2)
4 Cap nut (ME – 51 140 381) B 2)
5 Glass coupling piece (ME – 51 142 408) B 3)
6 Tube connection including sealing ring ME – 51 190 319 A 2) 3)
7 Cap Nut ME – 51 190 317 A 3)
8 Cap Nut including sealing (ME – 51 190 320) B 3)
7+8 Set of screw caps ME – 51 141 410 A 2)
9 Distance bar (ME – 51 142 407) B 2)
10 Screw M3 x 8 (ME – 51 195 307) B 2)
11 Clamp for transfer line (ME – 51 142 414) B 2)
12 Slot Nut (ME – 51 142 415) B 2)
13 Set screw M3 x 15 (ME – 00 076 314) B 2)
14 Knurled screw (ME – 51 191 737) B 2)
15 Clamping ring (ME – 51 142 416) B 3)
16 O-Ring 10 x 1.5 (ME – 51 191 863) B 3)
17 Clamping ring MS HT (ME – 51 142 464) B 2)
18 Screw (M4 x 12) (ME – 51 195 412) B 2)
- Synchronizing cable (ME – 51 140 536) B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

9.11 TGA-FTIR Kit ME – 51 142 410

1 Connecting flange (ME – 51 142 411) B 2)
2 O-Ring 3 x 1 ME – 51 190 535 A 3)
3 Sleeve (ME – 51 142 413) B 2)
4 Nut M5 x 0.5 (ME – 51 140 672) B 2)
5 Distance bar (ME – 51 142 412) B 2)
6 Screw M3 x 8 (ME – 51 195 307) B 2)
7 Clamp for transfer line (ME – 51 142 414) B 2)
8 Slot nut (ME – 51 142 415) B 2)
9 Knurled screw (ME – 51 191 737) B 2)
10 Setscrew M3 x 5 (ME – 00 076 314) B 2)
11 Clamping ring (ME – 51 142 417) B 3)
12 O-Ring 10 x 1.5 (ME – 51 191 863) B 3)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)


9.12 TGA-FTIR-MS-Kit ME – 51 142 405

1 Base plate (ME – 51 142 177) B 2)
2 Clamp 1 (ME – 51 142 175) B 2)
3 Washer (ME – 00 076 624) B 2)
4 Screw M6 x 16 (ME – 51 190 840) B 2)
5 Clamp 2 (ME – 51 142 176) B 2)
6 Screw M6 x 35 --- B 2)
7 Spring (ME – 51 191 741) B 2)
8 Fixing Nut (ME – 51 191 740) B 3)
9 Screw M6 x 45 x 24 (ME – 00 076 929) B 2)
10 Knurled cap --- B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)


9.13 TGA-Sorption Kit ME – 51 142 379


1 Attachment flange (ME – 51 142 380) B 2)
2 Cooling flange (ME – 51 142 381) B 2)
3 Sealing ring POM (ME – 51 191 695) B 3)
4 Screwed connection (ME – 51 191 763) B 3)
5 Tube nipple (ME – 51 142 153) B 2)
6 Tube holder (ME – 51 142 382) B 3)
7 Isolation flange POM (ME – 51 142 383) B 3)
8 Purge tube (ME – 51 142 384) B 2)
9 Sensor tube (ME – 51 142 385) B 2)
10 Clamping jacket 26 POM (ME – 51 142 463) B 3)
11 Clamping jacket 28 POM (ME – 51 142 388) B 3)
12 Screw M5 x 14 --- B 2)
13 Screw M4 x 30 x 20 --- B 2)
14 Screw M4 x 45 x 20 --- B 2)
15 Set screw M3 x 5 --- B 2)
1)
2)
recovered.
3)
4)

9.14 Accessories
See operating manual section 12


TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
CONTENTS PAGE
10 Drawings ........................................................................................................... 10-3

10.1 Fuses ................................................................................................................. 10-3
10.2 TGA/DSC 1 wiring diagram .............................................................................. 10-4
10.3 Line Module ES – 00 119 030 ........................................................................... 10-5
10.3.1 Schematic........................................................................................................... 10-5
10.3.2 Line Module Wiring ............................................................................................. 10-6
10.3.3 Connector Layout ............................................................................................... 10-7
10.4 Furnace power amplifier .................................................................................. 10-8
10.5 Power Supply ES – 51 140 873 ........................................................................ 10-9
10.5.1 Schematic (Main Sheet 1/3) ............................................................................ 10-9
10.5.2 Schematic (Peripheral Drive1 Sheet 2/3)....................................................... 10-10
10.5.3 Schematic (Peripheral Drive 2 Sheet 3/3)...................................................... 10-11
10.5.4 PCB Layout ...................................................................................................... 10-12
10.5.5 Jumper Settings................................................................................................ 10-13
10.5.6 Connector Layout ............................................................................................. 10-14
10.6 Step motor driver board (ES – 51 141 284)................................................... 10-16
10.7 Processor Board ES 51 142 284 .................................................................... 10-19
10.7.1 Schematic (Processor Sheet 1/6) .................................................................. 10-19
10.7.2 Schematic (Serial interfaces Sheet 2/6)......................................................... 10-20
10.7.3 Schematic (I/O ports Sheet 3/6) .................................................................... 10-21
10.7.4 Schematic (I/O ports to PS-Board Sheet 4/6) ................................................ 10-22
10.7.5 Schematic (Interface to Boards Sheet 5/6) .................................................... 10-23
10.7.6 Schematic (Interfaces Sheet 6/6) .................................................................. 10-24
10.7.7 PCB Layout ...................................................................................................... 10-25
10.7.8 Jumper Settings................................................................................................ 10-26
10.8 Analog Board (ES – 51 140 770) .................................................................... 10-27
10.8.1 Connections...................................................................................................... 10-27
10.8.2 Jumper settings analog board .......................................................................... 10-28
10.9 Thermocouple amplifier board (ES – 51 141 116) ........................................ 10-31
10.9.1 Connections...................................................................................................... 10-31
10.9.2 Jumper settings Rev. C .................................................................................... 10-31
10.9.3 Schematic Rev. C............................................................................................. 10-32
10.10 Cold junction furnace temperature board .................................................... 10-33
10.11 Cold junction sample temperature board..................................................... 10-35
10.12 Furnace position board.................................................................................. 10-36
10.13 Tube connections ........................................................................................... 10-37

Drawings TGA/DSC 1

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10 Drawings
10.1 Fuses
Mains fuses
Two power line fuses are located on the line module at the rear of the TGA/DSC 1:
Fuse For 115 V For 230 V Information

F1 4.0 AT 2.0 AT Fuse for line input via power switch
F2 6.3 AT 3.15 AT Fuse for line output via relay
Main switch 16 A 10 A Thermo fuse within the switch
Secondary fuses
Remove rear housing of the TGA/DSC 1.
Five fuses are visible at the top on the line module:
Fuse Fuse rating Information

F3 5.0 AT Fuse for +24 V and +5 V power supplies
F4, F5 1.25 AT Fuse for ±15 V power supply
F6 1.25 AT Fuse for +12.0 V power supply (balance)
F7 0.25 AT Fuse for -10.8 V power supply

to gas to Gas to Gas
10-4
sync / trigger Controller to LN2 to Computer
Controller Controller
out cooler SmartSens
GC10 / 20
Drawings
GC10 / 20 GC100 / 200 Terminal
12 3456 12 345 12 34567 Ethernet RS 232

KU1 KU2 KU3
board board
12 345678 KU1
Peripheral control board BU10
ME-51191770
+5V
-15V
+15V
DGND
SG ND
AG N D
ID /SEL
Processor board
ST11 ST12
ST 5
ST5
Sample
G ASFLO W
ME-51142099
changer ST3 26P ST4 26P
26P
26P
ST6 34P ST7 40P ST2 10P ST10 10P
10P
ST15
ME-119306 ME-119307 ME-51141096 ME-51142110
M E-51119612
M E-51119611
ST3 26P ST4 26P gy
2
ST6 34P ST7 40P ST2 10P P1 bl-rd

ST21 34P ST14 10P
KL14
gy-rd
3 2 1
pk
ST4 5P
ST11
ST11
P2
ME-51119305 Analog Board
Power supply board 1 5
2 1
20P
KL13
20P
bn
bn
wh
wh
KL2 KL5 KL6 KL7 KL9 KL1 KL3 KL4 vi
am plifier ST12
ST12
Therm ocouple
ST3 5P ST1 9P ME-51142108 bk

3 2 1
2 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 3 2 1
2 2 1 2 1
10/2009
2 1
10.2 TGA/DSC 1 wiring diagram
KL12
ST15 5P
26P
bl
3 4 3 2
26P
4 2 1
rd
5 9 7 6 5 1
ye
ST5
ST5 16P 8
gy
pk
bn
gn
wt
rd
bl
ye
wt
bn
gn
ME-
rd
rd
rd
or
or
bk
bk
ye
bk
bn
bn
SH
51141349
ST5 16P
9P KU1
ST1
M E-51142109
ME-51142103 ME-51142113
ME-51142113
25P
ST3
8P
25P
Stepper motor
VRB1
VRB1
4P
ME-51142107 ST1
(O PTIO N)
25P
M E-119095
driver board 8P
ST1 9P Chassis
Balance electronics Balance Sensor balance
9 8 77 6 5 4 3 2 1 ME-51142106
M E-51142104
M E-51142105
Line Cooling fl. Cell temp. Balance enclosure

sensor thermocouple Sensor
rd
ye
gn
bl
Furnace
rd
bk
ye
wh
module Furnace gn pk
2 1
12P
ye gy
KL5
2 1
2 1
KL1
KL4
power bn ST2 4P
KL3
ME-51142102
ST1
wt 2 1
KL2
2 1
Switch amplifier Preamp and cold junction bd.

Switched rd bl 15P
ye
line output 400 W
rd
bl or
M E-51142284
SM 600 W WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE OF
ST1 Mettler-Toledo AG THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
O ption
ST26 PUBLISH
Furnace 4P 8603 Schwerzenbach
position bk bk THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE THEM AVAILABLE
detection bl TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION, NOR TO USE IT
bl
FOR
M E-51119610
ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED TO HIM.
ST 50 3P
Automatic furnace TGA/DSC 1 WIRING DIAGRAM LS-51142001
Line input ye-gn
movement
Sheet 1/1
TGA/DSC 1

230 V 115 V
F1 10 0 21 0
BK L
L L
SI1 2 AT 4 AT BK
170 VA LINEFILTER
SI2 3.15 AT 6.3 AT 9 0 11 6 20 6
BL N
TGA/DSC 1
N N
6 T 7 T
1a 2a
BL
BK
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
230 V
21
10.3.1 Schematic
5 BK 13 0 L
L 0 22(K) 1
BK 1 2
BK
115 V
T 5
BK

LINE INPUT 1b 2b
4 6 BL 12(K) 12 6
N 11 N
5 00 V A
2
BL 0 22
3 45 8 T
3
MAIN SWITCH YE/GN
KL3 GR
GN
BL
PK
KL1
T O F U R N A C E P O W E R A M P L IF IE R
230 V 115 V 115 V 115 V
T 45 TRANSFORMER
16 0 15 6
TYPE 3120-10A 3120-16A
T 45
KL4
BL
BK
22 V 22 V 16 V 13 V 31 V
Y E /G N
BK
BN
BK
OR
BN
RD
RD
YE
OR
T 3 T 3 T 1 T 0 T 2
BK
10/2009
10.3 Line Module ES – 00 119 030
F2 7 0
AP2
AP1
BK 8 0 7 0 AP4 L
F5
F6
F3
F4
F7
LINE OUT
4 AT
1 .2 5 A T
1 .2 5 A T
1 .2 5 A T
600 VA
25 0 m A T
T 4 T 1 T 0 T 2
6 6 6 6 AP3
BL N
2 45
25 3 24 3 27 1 26 0 23 2
LIN E R E L A IS
RE1
BK
BK
YE
RD
BN
RD
BN
OR
OR
D1 1N4007
(O P T IO N )
PIN-NR. ST LINE MODULE --> 3 4 5 9 8 6 7 1 2
PIN-NR. ST1 ES POWER SUPPLY --> 18 19 20 24 23 21 22 16 17
AP 6
S w itch e d Line S o cke t
AP5
15 KABEL NR.
CAD JOB
K L2
CABLE NR. DRAWN 18.1.93 Birrer
2 S 0 CHANGED 22.03.00 Pfeiffer CHECKED LINEMODUL

TRAFO ANSCHLUSS
BK
RD
T WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE
TRANSFORMER CONNECTION Mettler-Toledo GmbH
OF THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
Analytical
PUBLISH THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE
DRAHTFARBE Sonnenbergstr. 74
0 THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
CABLE COLOR 8603 Schwerzenbach TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
PIN-NR. ST LINE MODULE --> 1 2 3 4 5
PIN-NR. ST1 ES POWER SUPPLY --> 10 11 12 13 14
FROM POWER SUPPLY

LINE MODULE ES - 00 119 030 E
REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE METTLER TOLEDO
Drawings
10-5
12 VOLTAGE SELECTOR F3 F4 F5 F6
10-6
6
T 20 T T 22
1 2 3
6 6 5 8 0 T 23 24 25 26
Drawings
1a 1 1b 2 2 3 3 3 3 0 0
13 0 45 3 2a 2 2b
T T T
7 0 0
27
T 21 22 1
T 1
F7
3
45
KL1 T T 27
23
LINE FILTER
2 4 0 1
T 25 24 26 T
11 6 20 6
2 3 3 0 1
T 45 KL4 45 T
MAIN SWITCH 10 0 21 0
10 0 UNTEN / BOTTOM
UNTEN / BOTTOM
10.3.2 Line Module Wiring
22 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
5 0 4 6
(K) (K)
9 0
F1
21 11
9 0 11 6 12 6
13 0 12 6
13 0
7 16 0 6 15 6
10/2009
ONLY WITHOUT
RELAIS BOARD S
45 2 2 0
KL3
1 2 3 4 5
5 0 6 4
Switched line socket S

KL2
(Option) TRANSFORMER
LINE INPUT ME - 00 119 066
6 15
AP3
6 6
AP1
8 0
2
6 0 0
45
6 8
2
7 0 7 16
(Option)
LINE OUT (OPTION)
AP4
AP2
F2 0 0
Switched line socket
DRAWN 18.1.93 R. Birrer CAD JOB

KABEL NR. GEMAESS SCHEMA ES - 00 119 030
15 CHANGED 27.03.07 R. Birrer CHECKED LINEMODUL
CABLE NR. ACCORDING TO SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ES - 00 119 030
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE
Mettler-Toledo GmbH
TRAFO ANSCHLUSS Analytical
T PUBLISH THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE
TRANSFORMER CONNECTION Sonnenbergstr. 74
THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
8603 Schwerzenbach TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
DRAHTFARBE
0
CABLE COLOR
KABELBINDER LINE MODULE ES - 00 119 030 F

TY RAP
REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE METTLER TOLEDO
TGA/DSC 1

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.3.3 Connector Layout
ST1 color to power supply module ST3 color to power supply module
1 bn 16 V AC 1 bk GND
2 bn 16 V AC 2 sh SHIELD
3 bk 17 V AC 3 rd +24 V DC
4 bk 17 V AC
5 or 22 V AC
6 ye 0 V AC (22 V AC) ST50 color To Furnace Supply
7 or 22 V AC 1 ye/gn Earth
8 rd 31 V AC 2 bl Neutral
9 rd 31 V AC 3 bk Line

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.4 Furnace power amplifier
ST50 Line input

P N E 90...264VAC
RELAY
0 6 45
24 VDC
FURNACE POWER AMPLIFIER

24 VDC "Artesyn"
Air filter
Fan
GND
V+
sh
bn wt
ST4
bn
sh
wt
400W
600W
sh
LI
N
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5
GND
GND
0...10Vin
+24VDC
ST26
ST26
high temperature
ST color pin signal value connection

no.
bk L
from
50 bl N Main power 90....264 VAC LINE MODULE
ye/gn E
600W 400W
wt 1 sh 1
to furnace
26 sh 2 wt 2 0.1 ... 50 V DC heating
bn 3 bn 3
1 + Safety relay + fan

24 V DC
2 - Safety relay + fan from
4 3 Shield shield power supply
ST4
4 Furnace control GND
0.1 ... 10 V DC
5 Furnace control signal

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.5 Power Supply ES – 51 140 873

10.5.1 Schematic (Main Sheet 1/3)

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.5.2 Schematic (Peripheral Drive1 Sheet 2/3)

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.5.3 Schematic (Peripheral Drive 2 Sheet 3/3)

10-12
Drawings
+24V
+5V
+6.5V
-15V
-10.8V
+15V
(+12V)
C87
ST14
10.5.4 PCB Layout
LC21
D25
R51
R54
D28
D34
D26
D31
D32
D35
D22 D27
LC22
ST2
ST7 ST6 R28 ST11
R58
R56
LC26
R29 IC10
C89
C40
RA3 C43 C78
C65 C66 D4
R57
R59
C67 R27 C80 ST15
ST21
C85
LC25
IC24
C81 D20
C79 IC14
R30
R62
IC9 D36
RA2
RA1
D5 R39
ST16 IC15
R46
LA1
C33 D19 C88 R35
IC12
R36 IC17
JP2
ST17
R45
ST4 C92
R47
ST9
C31 IC16 D37
DR2 C77 IC13
JP4
C68
D12 D23
R40
R34
10/2009
C76
LC28
R61
R65
R31
R33
R32
ST5
LC24
D6
LC23
R20
LC15 R21
LC27
C91 C75
C54 D7 C57 C58
T4 C32 JP3
LC14 D11
C71 C70
ST8
C83 C56 C46 C50 C51
R41 C47
T1
R19
C69
IC22 C25 IC11
C74
LC20 C73
T5
R24
R15
R25
R14
R18
R68
LC16 C44 C48 C49

C93
C55 C45
R16
R17
R26
LC18
LC19
R22
R23
D13 R44 C20
R66
LC17 R43 C15 R13 C9 C34 C35 C36 C37
R42 C82
C86 IC2 R11 IC8 IC7 IC3 IC5 IC4
C72
C27 D2 IC6
R52
R53 C8
LC13 R49 C23
T2 R50
D21
R12
C13
D3
C6
LC12 C21
D10
C22
ST3
R64
IC23
LC11 D15
R48
T3 D14
JP1
D18
R63 C64 GR1
D1
LC10
T6 R9 C12 GR2 GR3 GR4
C26
R10 R6
LA3 D24
C30
D17
D16
LC1
C24 C1 C52
C4 C38
LC2
R3
C16
R4
RE1
C14
LC5 C29 C41

IC1
DR1
R2
LC4
C7
R1
R5
C5
C53
C19
C18
R69
LC3 C28
ST1
C39
LC6 C17 C10
C11
LC7 R8 C42
R7 C84
C2 C3
LC8 C61
LC9

TGA/DSC 1
TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.5.5 Jumper Settings

green green green green green green
D 26 D 28 D 31 D 32 D34 D 35
+24V +5V +15V -15V +6.5/12V -10.8V
P ow er supply board
2
JP 2
1
2
JP 4
JP 3 1
1 2
A lum inum block

2
1 JP 1
J u m p e r S e t t in g s P o w e r S u p p ly B o a r d
Type / N o. JP 1 JP 2 JP 3 JP 4
T G A /D S C 1 NA NA NA NA
DSC 1 NA 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
D M A861e NA 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
TG A85Xe NA NA 1 - 2 1 - 2
TM A841e 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
TM A840 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
D SC827e NA 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
D SC823e NA 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
D SC82Xe NA 1 - 2 1 - 2 1 - 2
N A = n o t a s s e m b le d ( ju m p e r c o n n e c t e d t o o n e p in o n ly )

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.5.6 Connector Layout

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.6 Step motor driver board (ES – 51 141 284)
D6
JP2 JP1
9
ST1
JP5
16
ON OFF
1
ST5
1
1
JP3
JP4
JUMPER AND SWITCH SETTINGS

Type JP 1&2 JP 3 JP 4 JP 5 SW 1 SW 2 SW 3 SW 4 SW 5 SW 6 SW 7 SW 8
DSC822e 3-4 2-3 1-2 NC OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
DSC823e 3-4 2-3 2-3 NC OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
TGA85Xe 1-2 2-3 1-2 NC OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
TMA840 1-2 2-3 1-2 NC OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF
TMA841 1-2 2-3 2-3 NC OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
DSC 1 3-4 2-3 2-3 NC OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
TGA 1 1-2 2-3 1-2 NC OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF
MOTOR CURRENT SELECTION
JP1 & 2 Standby (mA) Run (mA) Boost (mA)
1-2 310 630 770
3-4 155 315 385
5-6 75 160 190
7-8 40 80 95
multiple selection allowable

JP3 +
Connection to the 1 SW 6 SW7

furnace position +5V 2 STDBY - OFF IC 5 IC 5
TGA/DSC 1
light barriers 3
VCO-IN DGND
IC 2
ST1 INH
FURNACE
IN FRONT C1A
NC 1 IC
IC 11 IC
IC 11 IC6
SW1 C1B
VCO-OUT
IC 3 SW2

orange FURNACE CLOSED
3 IC 1 IC 1 SW3
red
4 +5V
IC 3 SW4
blue IC 4 IC 3
5 DGND IC 3
SW5 I11
yellow FURNACE OPENED
2 IC 1 IC 1
CLK I10
RUN/STDBY PHASE1
ST5 CW/CCW STBY/RUN
SR OPENED RESET STBY/BOOST
2 IC7
SR CLOSED
3 PHASE2
10/2009
FURNACE IN FRONT
6 I20
IC 5
I21
14 JP4 +
15 +24V 3
T1
16 2
+5V 1
11 DGND
12 PGND
13
MOTENABLE
1 IC 2 IC 2
10 +5V
SR OP/CL
4 IC 2 IC 2 WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF: BY ACCEPTANCE OF
7 THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE THEM AVAILABLE
8 DGND
PWR FAIL
5 IC 2 SM DRIVER 1A (logic) ES - 51 141 284 B
Sheet 1/2
Drawings
10-17
+24V
10-18
Drawings
01A white
PHASE 1 9
I10
01B red
I11 8
PHASE 2
02A yellow
I20 7
I21
02B black
STDBY_OFF IC8 6
version step motor
EN1
+24V
VREF1
ME - 51141499 (9.5 Ohm)
wires from TGA / TMA new
T4 VREF2 ST1
RC1 E1
RC2 SEN1
E2
SEN2
T2
STBY/RUN
IC 4 IC 5
10/2009
STBY/BOOST PGND
T3 PGND
IC 5
SW8
1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8
MOTOR CURRENT SELECTION
PGND 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7
JP1&2 Stdby (mA) Run (mA) Boost (mA)
1-2 310 630 770
3-4 155 315 385
PGND
5-6 75 160 190
JP2 JP1
7-8 40 80 95
multiple selection available
THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE THEM AVAILABLE
SM DRIVER 1A (Endstage) ES - 51 141 284 B

Sheet 2/2

TGA/DSC 1
VDD VCORE VCORE VDD VCORE VDD
VCORE MAN_RESET DGND DGND DGND
JP19 4 S12
3 1
1 14 27 3 9 43 49
L4
L3
12 3 DGND 89 74 86 15212690 73 48 10 12547 9 13911063 35 22 13810962 34 21
IC45
1
RESET_5_ST3 6 5
R7
27
R
TP241 A1 23 2 D0
TP155 IC20 TP104
6
6 5 2 3 A2 24 4 D1
RESET_5_ST10 D29
3
R2
IC20 A3 25 5 D2
IC20 C72 C73
19 TP23 A4 D3
P AL
RESET_5_ST2 4 3 2 1 TP242 13 5 LAP5 CS_AXIS_CONTR0 26 7
_B
07
R
2
TP27 A5 D4
SU
14 4 LAP5 CS_AXIS_CONTR1 29 8
1C1
PT5 9 2
PT0 6 3
IC10 3 1 2 RESET_OUT
TGA/DSC 1
RESET_ST35 7 LAP3 A6 D5
_B
TP374 6 5 DGNDDGND 71 30 10
D N GD
D N GD
SU
C76 2 LAP3 CONTROL_BUS A7 D6
TP47 10LAP6 SYNC_IN 49 LAP3 31 11
RESET_IC 6 8 19LAP4 TP342 R109 14 SCS1 A8 D7
IC34 TP256 PWR_FAIL 32 26 32 13
TP26 IC18
6 LAP3 3 25 TP344 R103 15TP325 SCS0 A9 33 42 D8
RESET 4
AT A D
WD_CLK 5 LAP3
D N GD
7 13LAP5 TP13 5 LAP2 CE_DAC1 A10 D9
JP4 SIOCE0 98 24 34 44
S S E R D DA
TP88 IC18 TP244
4 LAP2 10 11 8 9 SIOCE1 12LAP5 97 23 TP29 6 LAP2 CE_PER8 A11 22 45 D10
RESET
IC20 12 3 11LAP5 A12 D11
TP58 IC10 4 CS_INT_ADC 96 20
TP206 7 LAP2
CS_PIO_SR VDD 35 47
RESET_ST31 2 1 10LAP5 TP207 8 LAP2 CS_COM_OPT A13 D12
CS_ADC1 95 19 JP8 36 48
TP86 IC10 DGND
4 3 IC20 CS_ADC2 9 LAP5 94 18 TP20 9 LAP2 CS1 50 D13
37
RESET_ST33 T4
R
TP324 TP282
TP117 IC10 TP165 HEATER_EN 13 12 CS_ADC3 8 LAP5 93 17 10LAP2 CS0 A23 20
IC2 51 D14
RESET_ST30 8 9 R68 7 LAP5 321 A24 D15
45
92 21 53
57
R
CS_ADC4
2
IC10
D3
TP134 6 LAP5 3 LAP2 WE CE_FLASH
RESET_ST50 10 11 CS_ADC5 91 16
TP137 IC10 "RESET" EN_OUT 18LAP5 68 15 2 LAP2 OE CS0 TP347 SCLK 38
RESET_ST60 12 13 DGND KU9
DGND CS_SMART_RIGHT 15LAP5 69 33 18LAP4 INT_SENSOR SCS1 A14 SCS1 SCKE 37 15 DQM0
R55
DET_SS_LEFT 16LAP5 70 36 TP218 17LAP4 INT_DUART CS1 A13 CS1/CS0 39 DQM1
CS_DAC_FURN 14LAP5 29 37 TP216 16LAP4 INT_COM_OPT WE B19 WE WE 16 17 SCAS

ST7
7 FC46 SCS0 SRAS
8 TP64 CS_DAC_COOL 9 LAP3 31 5 TP157 19 18
9 KU9
+5V 10 CS_ACT_PIO 8 LAP3 30 6 TP251 OE TP417 A11 OE
11 IC4
12 SIOINT1 15LAP4 38 7 TP174 R137 19LAP3 SCAS SCAS B17 SCAS
ST7 C50 C52 MP1 TP110 17LAP5 TP186 R136 18LAP3 SRAS SRAS TP418 28 41 54 6 12 46 52
1 READY_INT_ADC 12 11 118 8 B18 SRAS

2 5 LAP3 TP190 R138 17LAP3 DQM0 DQM0
DGND 3 DRDY_ADC1 117 11 B15 WBE0
7
6
D1
D1
4 13 4 LAP3 TP191 R139 16LAP3 DQM1 DQM1 TP419
5 C51 DRDY_ADC2 116 12 A15 WBE1 DGND
6 DGND VDD VDD VDDVDD TP133 CONTROL_BUS
DRDY_ADC3 3 LAP3 115 27 TP203 R134 13LAP3 SCKE SCKE TP420 A17 SCKE
TP327 C33 TP204 R135 12LAP3 SCLK SCLK
E7 BVDET_COM_OPT0 3 LAP1 114 28 A18 SCLK
E7 AGND
BVDET_COM_OPT1 2 LAP1 113 108 TP73 10LAP3 XDACK1
FC4 KU9 A1 D0
41
ST7 TP89 TP109 8 TP74 11LAP3 XDREQ1 31 35
4R
2 LAP7
42
15 +12V SMART_LED_RIGHT 112 VDD B13
R
+12V 107 A2 D1
83
93
16 VDD 26 37
R
R
D N GD
TP75 3 LAP7
ST7 MP6 1 DGND SS_LEFT_CONN 111 B14 A3 D2
13 TP108 C46 IC12 TP45 11LAP2 A24 25 39
PGND
PT4 1 3
14 2 7 RESET 137 DGND B11 A4 D3
TP107 DGND 24 41
D8
D9
3 6 IICSCL IICSCL 6 LAP4 TP99 61 140 TP46 12LAP2 A23 ADDRESS_BUS B12 A5 23 44 D4
TERMGND 5 IICSDA IICSDA 7 LAP4 TP62 60 141 13LAP2 A22 A22 TP421 A19 A22
C147 A6 D5
14LAP2 A21 A21 22 46
142 A16 A21
_S
E7 A7 21 48 D6
DGND 4 SIOTXD 10LAP4 TP35 15LAP2 A20 A20 TP422
59 143 B16 A20 A8 D7
_B
SIORDY 9 LAP4 TP37 16LAP2 A19 A19 20 50

DGND 58 144 A20 A19
SU
A9 10 36 D8
TP368 FC47 SIORXD 11LAP4 TP44 57 145 17LAP2 A18 A18 TP423 A21 A18
ST7 TP56 A10 D9
35 +15V SIOCLK 8 LAP4 TP51
IC1 18LAP2 A17 A17 TP424 9 38
56 146 B20 A17
_B
+15VST7 TP369 A11 D10

36 8 40
AT A D
SU
A16 A16
OI S S
19LAP2
R E WOP YL P P U
147 B21 A16 A12 D11
MP2 TXD0 TP55 4 LAP1 A15 A15 7 42
100 148 A22 A15
65
55
ST7 TP28 TP43
C
C
8
A13 D12
C5
39 RXD0 TP77 5 LAP1 A14 A14 TP425 6 45
AGNDST7 99 149 A23 A14 A14 D13
40 RTS0 TP146 6 LAP1 A13 A13 TP426 5 47
ST7 102 150 B22 A13 A15 D14
37 4 49
D N GA
TP371 FC48 CTS0 TP100 101 151 7 LAP1 A12 A12 A26 A12
4
-15V ST7
C5
75
TP63 A16 D15
C
38 -15V TXD1 TP97 8 LAP1 A11 A11 3 51
TP370 104 153 A12 A11
S S E R D DA
A17 54
IC3
C53 RXD1 TP96 103 154 9 LAP1 A10 A10 TP427 A25 A10 A18 19
E8 STP1 RTS1 TP15 106 155 10LAP1 A9 A9 A24 A9 A19 18
TP328 CTS1 TP98 11LAP1 A8 A8
T RA U
SGND 105 156 B23 A8 A20
E8 TP49 12LAP1 A7 A7 TP428 11
157 B24 A7 A21
SGND VDD VCORE 13LAP1 A6 A6 12
10/2009
158 B25 A6 A22
14LAP1 A5 A5 TP429 15
159 B26 A5 A23
D12 TP415 VDD IC18 2
TP87 160 15LAP1 A4 A4 TP430 A1 A4 CE_FLASH
4
A24
D1
_B
TP315 R88 TP301 1 32

10.7.1 Schematic (Processor Sheet 1/6)
SPEED_CLK3 LAP5 16LAP1 A3 A3

SU
TP14 12 13 72 1 A2 A3 OE
MOI S N E T X_E
3 2 1 5 INT_CATCHER 12LAP4 17LAP1 A2 A2 TP431 34

IC13 41 2 B2 A2 WE
IC14 4 TP384 27 13
INT_PLATE A1 A1
10.7 Processor Board ES 51 142 284
13LAP4 40 3 18LAP1 B1 A1
84
TP385
C
3 4 C13 INT_LEVER 14LAP4 19LAP1 A0 KU9 28
21
Y R O ME N
_R
39 4 TP387
C
7
TP386
C4
30 17
24
C120
R
1 DGND DGND TP120 DGND DGND * R89 R27
IC18 KU9 TP219 TP1
14
55 53 VDD
R
T OBSO
TP345 6 5 119 D15 D15 TP432 4 LAP0 B10 D15
* 2 TP220
TP416 DGND 56 16 DGND
L O RT N O C
120 D14 D14 5 LAP0 B9 D14

DGND TP341 * R90
DGND 14 R26
2 LAP5 D13 D13 TP433 6 LAP0 RESET
67 121 B8 D13 VDD
3
R4
* C5 VDD 43
94
C
WD_CLK 4 LAP4 122 D12 D12 7 LAP0 B7 D12
R47
0
29
R4
VDD DGND
DGND TP124 55 123 D11 D11 TP434 8 LAP0 B6 D11
R48 33 321
DGNDDGND 6 1 TP125 54 124 D10 D10 9 LAP0 B5 D10
DGND R49 52
RA2 TP126 53 127 D9 D9 TP435 10LAP0 B4 D9
R50
TP127 52 128 D8 D8 11LAP0 B3 D8 JP18
R51 DGND
TP128 51 129 D7 D7 12LAP0 A10 D7
TP281 RESET_IC VDD
ST9 D6 D6 TP436 13LAP0
VTREF A1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 130 A9 D6
L6
VSUPPLY B1 VDD 2 3 3 2 1 131 D5 D5 14LAP0 A8 D5
D30 D31 2 JP2
TRST A2 TP217 3 LAP0 42 132 D4 D4 TP437 15LAP0 A7 D4
TP173TP450
TDO A7 TP449 TP246 46 133 D3 D3 16LAP0 A6 D3
TDI A3 TP198 45 134 D2 D2 TP438 17LAP0 A5 D2
TP199 D1 D1 18LAP0 +12V +5VGC VREF +15V -15V
TMS A4 44 135 A4 D1
TCK A5 TP200 43 136 D0 D0 TP439 19LAP0 A3 D0
SRST A8 TP214 2 LAP0 50 KU9
TP215 DATA_BUS
RTCK A6
ST9 TP213
6
5
6
5
5
B2
R5
R8
R8
1R1
2R1
B3 88 87 65 64 66 85 84 83 82 81 80 79 78 77 76 75
B4 +15V
GATJ
B5 TP132 TP121TP122 TP123 TP183 TP184 TP185 TP221 TP222
97
B6
R
GND B7 3 R69 C21 C22 C60 C59
B8 DGND
L7
B9 DGND
51
D
B10 2
B11 DGND +12V TP303 R80 MP5
TP225 TP131
2
7
5
1
1
ST9 DGND DGNDDGNDDGND 3.6864MHz

C6
C8
C9
3TP24 SQ2
2C1
3C1
DBGRQ A9 TP6
DBGACK A10 TP7 3 SQ1
R133 MP4 T1 CPU CLOCK
A11 TP194
75
19
59
TP205 TP388 TP398

R
R
R
5
5
TP129
02
D
A12 TP197 1 2 9 9
4R1
3R1
D2
B12 TP380 2 VCORE TP178
NC 2 VDD TP210 TP399 TP176D5
A13 TP381 TP25 C19 * C20 C17 C18 IC18 7 7 DGND
B13 TP382 TP5 TP389 TP400 R46
ST9 6 6 DGND
TP390 TP401
5 5
DGND DGND DGND DGND TP391 TP402 TP72 R53
5
3 3 TP101
R4
41
11
11
* part not assembled
R
44
TP135 TP392 TP403
4R
3R
IC18 2 2
TP50 IC20 TP4 TP70 TP71 TP57 MP3 TP393 TP404
R112 CAD JOB
12
11 10 TP383 10 4 10 4
D
*KL1 20LAP7 IC41 IC42 DRAWN 6.4.06 R. Birrer
* 1 LAP7 9 8
D1
22
32
81
TP394 TP405
D
D
D
* 1 LAP6 20LAP6 13 13
*KL2 20LAP5 TP302 CHANGED 19.9.06 R.Birrer CHECKED AG13_70
* 1 LAP5 20LAP4 TP395 TP406
* 1 LAP4 20LAP3 12 12
*KL3 * 1 LAP3
2"1 V "
"3,3V "
"2,5V "
"5V "
20LAP2 TP396 TP61 TP407 WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE
TERMGND DGND DGND * 1 LAP2 14 14 Mettler-Toledo AG
41
-15V DGND 20LAP1
9R
* 1 LAP1 OF THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
/ +" 5-1 V "

20LAP0 TP397 TP408
* 1 LAP0 15 15 Analytical
DGND PUBLISH THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE
DGND IC42 1 1 Sonnenbergstr. 74
VCORE VDD VDD DGND THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
16 8 8603 Schwerzenbach TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
IC41
CI 2 4
CI 1 4
CI 8 1
CI 9 1
CI 0 1
CI 3
CI 2
VDD DGND
16 8
CI 0 2
IC20
14 VCC 7 DGND
C1
11
C6
C7
C8
C9
C
C2
C3
C4
0
C1
51
41
16
47
IC18 11 11
6
9
C
C
C
8
7
C
Processorboard EOS ES-51142284 A
C9
C9
C9
C9
0
0
0
3
4
01
01
01
14 VDD 7 DGND TP180 R32 R33 CORE
0
0
1C1
5C1
7C1
5C1
0C1
6C
3C
4C
0C1
2C1
TP182
DGND DGND IC10 REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 1/6
DGND 14 VDD 7 DGND DGND METTLER TOLEDO
Drawings
10-19
OPTION LINK TO PC (TAS)
10-20
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
T S 02
Drawings
ST10 FC31 R131 B25 B24 B23 B22 B21 B20 B19 B18 B17 B16 B15 B14 B13 B12 B11 B10 B9 B8 B7 B6 B5 B4 B3 B2 B1
RESET(5V) 9 TP164 RESET_5_ST10 A25 A24 A23 A22 A21 A20 A19 A18 A17 A16 A15 A14 A13 A12 A11 A10 A9 A8 A7 A6 A5 A4 A3 A2 A1
ST10 FC26 R34
5 TP116 TP208 14 11 RTS1
RTS
FC27 R35 10 TXD1
ST10 TP167 TP9 7 DGND
TXD 2
FC30 R36 VDD
ST10
1
TP118 TP240 CTS1
1
_C T P_O
13
41
03
_C T P_O
6 13 12
R
R
PT 0 6
CTS
0
P T3 0 1
0
0
0
0R
FC29 R37 9 RXD1
ST10 8
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TP119 TP10
S CM O
RXD 3
T NI M O
FC28
DX T
ST C
ST R
IC11
DX R
ST10
EO
T RA U
E W
GND 1 TP113 4 1 TP111 ADDRESS_BUS DATA_BUS
CONTROL_BUS
K CA D X
QE R D X
ST10 C42 C43
4 DGND ST11
D R A O-B
-/T
B1
ST10 ST11VCC
7 TP114 5 3 TP112 A1
ST11
ST10 E3 VDD B2
UART
A MD A M
10
1
0
2 6 ST11VDD
TP115 TP2 A2
D RA U G
ST10 ST11
8 NC E3 B3 GND
ST11
A3 RESET
44
54
ST11
C
C
B4 GND
_C T P_O
_C T P_O
VDD DGND TXD0 ST11
MO
MO
A4 TXD_TAS
T ESE R
E C N AL L A B OT K NI L
RXD0 ST11
B5 RXD_TAS
RTS0 ST11
A5 RTS_TAS
R15 CTS0 ST11
IC52 B6 CTS_TAS
T E DV B
T E DV B
VDD ST11
T RA U
TP445 A6 GND
8 9
S A T OT K NI L
DGND
VDD 10
38 39 IC52
TP226 ST12
12 11 B1
TP310 ST12VCC
A0 22 D0 A1
40
S U-B
A1 D1 13 R75 ST12
42 12 TP448 VDD B2
A2 D2 ST12VDD
44 21 IC52 A2
A3 D3 ST12
10/2009
1 13 DGND TP446 B3 GND
CE_DUART D4 5 6 ST12
D DV
20 RESET A3
D DV
RESET
S U-B
IC19 R106 D5 ST12
VDD 33 14 4 B4 GND
TP94
S U-B
INT_DUART 8 D6 ST12
9 18 19 A4 TXD_PER
S S E R D DA
R74 ST12
WE D7 IC52
AT A D
71
3 15 B5 RXD_PER
01
VDD
5R
OE TP447 ST12
4 3 2 A5 RTS_PER
R25 TP162 ST12
VDD 11 29 TP223 B6 CTS_PER
R104 TP161 1 ST12
RESET 32
IC7 28 TP224 A6 GND
TP233 VDD
11 10 13 12 TP68 R8 TP67 DGND
L O RT N O C
TP170 IC19 TP232 IC19 1
TP143 2 5
TP228 TP130 FC1
10.7.2 Schematic (Serial interfaces Sheet 2/6)
INT_SSTA TP172 19LAP7 43 6 3 5 R9 FC33 KU1

TP145 18LAP7 TERMGND 9
INT_ACTOR 34 TP229 6 +12V
TP444 1 2 SYNC_SR 6 +12V
IC4 SIOINT0 TP152 17LAP7 41 27 IC5 8
IC19
R4
R5
TERMGND 5 GND
Y R E H PI R E P OT K NI L
IDENT_SELECT_STATUS 2 3 TP163 16LAP7 37 7 TP227 13LAP7 2 7 R6

D3 4 DP
TP171 15LAP7 36 26 TP153 12LAP7 9 8 TP102
IC4 2 IDENT_SELECT_STATUS
1 14LAP7 TP154 IC27 TP1423 4 3 WN
35 8 TP69 R7 TP66 FC2
TP158 11LAP7 2 DN
N2_LEVEL_OK 5 6 3.6864MHz 30 25 DGND TP442
TP159 10LAP7 1 2 HEATER_EN TERMGND 1 WP
9 IC27
TP234 4
TP160 9 LAP7 8
24 3 TP12 R1 TP11 C25
TP409 TP231 TP230 4 7
NC 31 10 5 6 SYNC_ACTOR IC27 FC44
IC19
IC27 E4
16 17 8 LAP7 5 TP17 R2 TP16 TERMGND TP443
6
R3
4
4
FC45
8R1
7R1
DGND
TERMGND
DGND
L A NI MR E T OT K NI L
CHANGED 19.9.06 R.Birrer CHECKED AG13_70
Mettler-Toledo AG
Analytical
VDD IC52 Sonnenbergstr. 74
VDD DGND THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
IC11
CI 1 1
CI 5
CI 2 5
CI 7
CI 4
16 VDD 15 DGND
CI 7 2
C26 C16 C77 C28 C27 C116 IC27
14 VCC 7 DGND
IC19 Processorboard EOS SERIAL INTERFACES ES-51142284 A
14 VDD 7 DGND
DGND
IC4
DGND 14 VDD 7 DGND REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 2/6 METTLER TOLEDO

TGA/DSC 1
15 18LAP6 TP288 GPIO_EXT0 TP260 TP305
8 2 18 TP410 SMART_LED_RT
A22 1 17LAP6 TP289 GPIO_EXT1 SMART_LED_RIGHT 9
14
IC43 3 17 TP411
13 16LAP6 TP290 GPIO_EXT2
TP259 ST3
CS_ADC1 4 16 2 CS ADC1
_B
A23 2 IC26 12 15LAP6 TP279 GPIO_EXT3
ST3
SU
ST5 TP286 CS_ADC2 5 IC28 15 3 CS ADC2
1 11 ST3
ST5 TP287 CE_DUART CS_ADC3 6 14 4 CS ADC3
3 FC52 A24 3 10 13LAP6
7 13 TP263 CS_ONBD_ADC
ST5 12LAP6 TP106 CE_PIC0 CS_INT_ADC
TGA/DSC 1
GUARD 5 9 SIOCLK ST3

ST5 11LAP6 TP105 CE_PIC1 8 12 15 SCLK
14 7 SIOTXD
ST5 DGND 9 11 SIOCLK_5
26 ST3
_B
ST5 E4 1 SIORXD_5 16 SDATA_IN
S S E R D DA
NC 11
SU
ST5 19 SIOTXD_5
OI S S
NC 12 TP262
ST5 4 5 6 R84
NC 18
ST5 RESET 3
NC 19 TP149 CE_PER8
92
81
JP11 2
R
R
ST5
NC 20 DGND 6x
ST5 DGND DGND 1 ST3
NC 22 DATA_BUS RESET_5_ST3 22 RESET
ST5 TP337 D0 D0 ST3
L O RT N O C
CW/CCW 6 FC22 19 2 2 19 7 SC1 ADC2
ST5 TP338 GPO0 D1 D1 GPO1 ST3
STDBY_CATCHER 7 18 3 3 18 6 SC1 ADC1
ST5 FC24 TP339 D2 D2 ST3
STDBY_LEVER 8 17 4 4 17 8 SC1 ADC3
ST5 TP340 IC6 D3 D3 IC8 ST3
STDBY_PLATE 9 16 5 5 16 9 CAL ADC1/3
ST5 FC23 ST3
SAMPLE_DET_EN 13 FC25 TP343 15 6 D4 D4 6 15 24 CAL ADC2

ST5 TP346 D5 D5 ST2
RES_OUT01 10 14 7 7 14 6 SWITCH_OUT0
ST4 FC35 ST2
SELECT FC36 13 8 D6 D6 8 13 3 SWITCH_OUT1
6
ST4 D7 D7 ST2
RES_OUT21 7 12 9 9 12 4 START_FURN_MOT
ST4 IC15 WE WE IC15 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 ST2
4 NC 2 4 RESET_5_ST2 1 RESET_5
ST4 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 TP238 TP243
9 NC 1 11 3 6 11 1
RA7
ST4 GPIO_EXT0 GPIO_EXT15
1 1
ST4
10
EN_GPO EN_GPO 6 1
DGND RA9
6 1 ST3
1 GND
ST3
DGND4x DGND 5
DGND ST3
10
ST5 TP348 D0 D0 DGND ST3
COVER_PLACED_ON 21 FC37 2 18 18 2 14
ST5 TP349 GPI0 D1 D1 GPI1 ST3
SAMPLE_CATCHED 23 3 17 17 3 17
ST5 FC38 TP350 D2 D2 ST3
BVDET_SR0 25 4 16 16 4 23 GND
ST5 TP351 IC22 D3 D3 IC21 ST3
BVDET_SR1 24 5 15 15 5 18 TEMP.-HEATER-ERROR
ST2 FC51FC39 D4 D4 ST3
PS_ANA_FAILED 7 6 14 14 6 19 TEMP.-SAMPLE-ERROR
ST2 D5 D5 ST3
24V_FAILED 8 7 13 13 7 20 DSC/DTA-ERROR
ST2 D6 D6 ST4
10/2009
FURN_IN_FRONT 5 8 12 12 8 5 TEMP_COOLER_ERROR
10.7.3 Schematic (I/O ports Sheet 3/6)
ST2 D7 D7 ST3
RES_INP01 10 9 11 11 9 21 SENSOR-ERROR
ST2
GND 2 10 9 8 7 5 4 3 2 1 1
ST2 DATA_BUS 2
GND 9 19 19
GPIO_EXT0 GPIO_EXT1 3
DGND IC51
OE OE 4 CS_ADC4 5 6
IC51 ST3
RA21 5 6 3 2 25 RES OUT1
1 6 4
7 1
IC19 1
R155 CONTROL_BUS 8 DGND TP141
IC45 DGND EN_OUT TP169 3 4 19LAP5
FC10
12
TP245 9
R
ST5 R156
PWR_FAIL 4 10 11 13
5x IC27 IC27 10 IC51
R157 10 DGND ST3
DGND IC51 11 12 26 RES OUT2
AR 8
ST5 TP257 TP258 TP18 SPEED_CLK

SPEED_CLK 2 FC13 10 11 12 13 CS_ADC5 9 8
ST5 TP249 TP90 INT_LEVER R28
REF_LEVER 17 2 18
ST5 FC14 INT_SR TP252 TP237 INT_PLATE
REF_PLATE 16 3 17
ST5 TP253 TP93 INT_CATCHER
REF_CATCHER 15 4 16 IC45
FC15 14 VCC 7 DGND
O
VDD
D N GD
ST3 FC21 IC29

DRDY ADC1 11 5 15 DRDY_ADC1
ST3 TP275 IC28
20 VCC 10 DGND
T OBS_R
DRDY ADC2 12 6 14 DRDY_ADC2

CI 1 5
CI 9 2
CI 5 1
CI 1 2
CI 6 2
CI 2 2
CI 5 2
ST3 READY_SENSOR TP40

DRDY ADC3 13 7 13 DRDY_ADC3 IC6
ST7 FC32 TP239 IC45 IC45 C137 C85 C29 C24 C23 C79 C78 20 VCC 10 DGND
PWR_FAIL_SOURCE 30 1 2 3 2 LAP4 TP335 8 12 TP19 PWR_FAIL_ST31
4
3 LAP4 TP336 TP36 IC8
9 11 PWR_FAIL 20 VCC 10 DGND
TP296 1 IC15
DGND DGND 14 VDD 7 DGND
19
21
2R
IC45 DGND
TP326 CHANGED 19.9.06 R.Birrer CHECKED AG13_70
9
11
PWR_FAIL_5_D34 8
9R
IC45 Mettler-Toledo AG
IC25 DGND OF THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
R87 TP156 TP299 Analytical
12 13 9 PUBLISH THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE
D35 TP264 TP265 Sonnenbergstr. 74
8 THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
"PWR_FAIL" 8603 Schwerzenbach TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
10
CI 5 4
CI 8
CI 8 2
CI 6
IC21 IC25
20 VDD 10 DGND C30 C94 C83 C82 14 VDD 7 DGND
IC22 IC26
02
R
20 VDD 10 DGND 16 VDD 8 DGND Processorboard EOS I/O PORTS-1 ES-51142284 A
IC51 DGND IC29
14 VDD 7 DGND DGND 20 VDD 10 DGND REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 3/6 METTLER TOLEDO
Drawings
10-21
IC4
10-22
ST7 TP209
SYNC_IN 28 9 8 SYNC_IN
D0 D0 ST6
Drawings
2 18 2 19 9 DF0
ST7 10 D1 D1
DGND 22 3 17 3 18 10 DF1
ST7 TP269 GPI2 D2 D2
PS_OK 33 4 16 4 17 11 DF2
ST7 IC39 D3 D3 IC23
SAMPLE_ROOM_OPENED 26 5 15 5 16 12 DF3
ST7 D4 D4
SAMPLE_ROOM_CLOSED 27 6 14 6 15 13 DF4
ST7 D5 D5
PS_BOARD_VAR_DET1 32 7 13 7 14 14 DF5
ST7 D6 D6
_F
PS_BOARD_VAR_DET2 31 8 12 8 13 15 DF6
ST4 D7 D7
RES_INP1 8 9 11 9 12 16 DF7
TP412 ST6
AADN R U
DGNDST7 29 1
ST7 5 4 3 2 7 8 9 10
DGND 17 19 11 1
E C ACN
ST7 GPIO_EXT2
DGND 34
4
OE
3R1
DGND
RA4 DGND
6 1
_B
SU
DGND
S U-B
ST6 D0 D8 ST6
AT A D
RES_OUT1 4 19 2 2 19 17 DF8
ST7 D1 D9
RES_OUT2 24 18 3 3 18 18 DF9
L O RT N O C
ST7
GPO2 D2 D10
SAMPLE_ROOM_OP/CL 23 17 4 4 17 19 DF10
ST7 IC38 D3 D11 IC24
SYNC_OUT 25 16 5 5 16 20 DF11
ST7 D4 D12
GAS_VENT1 19 15 6 6 15 21 DF12
ST7 D5 D13
GAS_VENT2 18 14 7 7 14 22 DF13
ST7 D6 D14
_F
FAN 20 13 8 8 13 23 DF14
ST7 D7 D15
LINE_RELAIS 21 12 9 9 12 24 DF15
WE ST6
AADN R U
IC15 9
2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 TP375
1 11 8 TP255 11 1 RESET
E C ACN
10 GPIO_EXT2
EN_GPO ST6
N2_LEVEL_OK 2 N2_LEVEL_OK
RA5
6 1 1 GND
10/2009
9 LAP6 3 GND
D34
DGND 5 GND
PWR_FAIL_5_D34
ST6 3 2 8 GND
GND 25 TP166
D0 3 HEATER_EN 6 HEATER EN+
S U-B
DC0 26 19 2 R82
D1 7 HEATER EN-
DC1 27 18 GPO3 3 IC25 ST6
D2 DGND
DC2 28 17 4
AT A D
_B
D3 2 1
DC3 29 16 5
SU
IC35
DC4 30 15 6 D4 WE
DC5 31 14 7 D5 CE_DAC1
DC6 32 13 8 D6
DC7 33 12 9 D7
GND 34 IC15 12 WE
ST6 10 9 8 7 2 3 4 5
L O RT N O C
1 11 TP376 11 IC25
6
DGND GPIO_EXT3
13
REL O O C C A D
12 RESET
10.7.4 Schematic (I/O ports to PS-Board Sheet 4/6)
P AL
RA12 EN_GPO EN_GPO14 TP235 11

1 6
13 EN_OUT
DGND
CHANGED 19.9.06 R.Birrer CHECKED AG13_70

Mettler-Toledo AG
Analytical
IC23 Sonnenbergstr. 74
VDD 20 VCC 10 DGND THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
8603 Schwerzenbach TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
CI 5 3
CI 4 2
CI 8 3
CI 3 2
IC24
20 VCC 10 DGND
C41 C31 C32 C81 C80
CI 9 3
IC35
20 VCC 10 DGND
IC38 Processorboard EOS ES-51142284 A
DGND 20 VCC 10 DGND
DGND
IC39
20 VDD 10 DGND REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 4/6 METTLER TOLEDO

TGA/DSC 1
VREF
FC11 2
D26
DGND TP138R127 IC49
11 TP53 1
10 CS_SMART_RIGHT TP147
FC7
8 SMART_SENSE_RXD TP359 ST4
DGND FC6 3 3 TEMP_COLD_JUNC2
7 SMART_SENSE_CLK R64
DGND FC57
TGA/DSC 1
SGND C143
6 DGND C125
TP441 SMART_SENSE_TXD
5 FC55
06
R
4 TP440 VREF ST4
DGND 2 SGND
3 SMART_LED_RT
FC56
2 VREF
DGND
1 TP300 TP175
TP278 R102 IC25 C122 2
C109 D24
21
9 3 4 5 6 4
4R
FC3
BU1 TP283 IC43 IC43 6 INT_SSTA TP352 TP8 R125 IC33
TP306 1
E4 DGND DGND 5 C69 TP79
TP277
2
ST4
R2
3 23 TEMP. COOLER
91
R
DGND 9 1 R62
SGND SGND C141
DGND
R83 C123
TP354
85
4 LAP6
R
SIOTXD_5 14 2

5 LAP6 ST4
SIORXD_5 12 3 24 SGND
Al e n n a h C es n e St r a mS
R67 IC17
IC43 6 LAP6 TP247 16 4
IC43 SIOCLK_5
TP317 TP329 VREF
TP311 TP312 R110
TP316 READY_INT_ADC 13 5
13 12 11 10 DET_SS_LEFT R81
FC5 CS_ONBD_ADC 7 LAP6 15 8 6
TP355 D25
E4 7 6 IC33
C145 TP38 R126
TP309 FC8 7
DGND TP92
2 IC43 TP291
SGND 3 11 10 ST4
4 5 25 TEMP_COLD_JUNC1
TP318 TP319 R111
TP320 TP52
1 2 SS_LEFT_CONN D7 SGND R63
BU2 5 FC9 SGND C142
2
3 R108 C124
TP356
95
R
1 E4 VREF
C110 TP294 L5 ST4
41
26 SGND
1R
07
C
DGND FC41
17
C
ST4
TP321 FC12 +15V 17
PS 1
VREF +15V
SGND 18
SGND
6 AGND 19
AGND
IC49 D27 C67 20
10/2009
R128 TP139
7 -15V 15
FC19 FC40 TP179 -15V
FC42 16
BU10 TP377 R65 TP293 E4
GASFLOW 1 5 11
TP41 C144 +5V
BU10 SGND 12
E1 FC43
Bl e n n a h C es n e St r a mS
9 C126
SHIELD AGND DGND 13
10 AGND DGND
16
14
R
BU10 C40 ST4
SGND 7 R130 C68
C127
TP292 VREF
BU10 TP357 R132 TP42 E4
IDENT/ 8 IDENT_SELECT_STATUS +15V TP361
SELECT FC20
10.7.5 Schematic (Interface to Boards Sheet 5/6)
7 1 TP362
DGND
8
2
BU10 L1 SI1 -
+15V 6 +15V IC50 D28 FC34
R129 ST4
FC16 TP358 21 VREF
+15V 6
C35 +15V 2 6 TP140 TP236
C36 IC16
BU10
AGND 4 C65 3 C64
E1 VDD + C63 C66
CI 0 5
CI 3 3
CI 9 4
66
AGND 4 E4
R
C34 C129 C133 C131

4 5
BU10 FC17 SI2
CI 3 4
EL U D O-M
ST4
-15V 2 -15V SGND 22 REFGND
AGND C128 C132 C130 TP353 -15V
11
L2
1C
DGND
CI 9 4
CI 0 5
CI 3 3
WOL F S A G
+5VGC 8
BU10 TP3 TP270 -15V CHANGED 19.9.06 R.Birrer CHECKED AG13_70
+5V 3 1 6
FC18 WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE
Mettler-Toledo AG
TP273 OF THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
D4
BU10
2 IC9 7 Analytical
83
C
5 C39 Sonnenbergstr. 74
DGND THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
C37 TP271
TP272
4
IC43
14 VDD 7 DGND
01
R
IC49 Processorboard EOS ES-51142284 A
E1 8 +15V 4 -15V
DGND IC33
E1 8 +15V 4 -15V REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 5/6 METTLER TOLEDO
Drawings
10-23
SIOCLK
R11 RA19
SIOTXD BD7 BD7TP85 ST31
A1 D7
ST60 IC44 ST33 RA19 1 8
SIORXD_ACT A2 2 3 B2 SIOTXD BD6 BD6TP34 B2 D6
2 7 RA19
10-24
TP76 ST33 BD5 BD5TP33
D N GD
INT_ACT A5 ACTOR_INT B1 SIOCLK A2 D5
SYNC_ACT B5 SYNC_ACTOR 1 RA19 3 6
B6 VDD 18 2 VDD BD4 BD4TP32 B3 D4
RESET RESET_ST60 4 5 RA13
TP181 R92 TP189 BD3 BD3TP22
Drawings
CS_DAC_FURN B3 13 IC31 4 LAP7 B4 D3

TP192 ST33 RA13 1 8
CS_DAC_COOL A3 TP378 1 12 TP280 SIORXD 16
IC36 4 A2 SIORXD BD2 BD2 TP21 A4 D2
2 7 RA13
CS_ACT_PIO B4 TP379 2 BD1 BD1 TP81 B5 D1
RA13 3 6
A6 14 6 BD0 BD0TP84 A5 D0
GND A4 DGND TP363 4 5 ST31
B1
ST60 SIORDY TP267 ST33 D0
12 8 A3 SIORDY 2 18 BD0
CS_ACT_PIO ST33 D1
A1 GND 3 17 BD1
CS_DAC_COOL 1 3 ST33 D2 VDD
B4 GND 4 16 BD2
CS_DAC_FURN 5 4 ST33 D3 ST31
TP366 B6 GND 5 15 BD3 B13
/O
_B
LAP4 2 VDD
D4 IC32
SU
6 14 BD4 A13
_B
6 5 TP451 DGND
OI S S
IC44 D5
SU
TP168 7 13 BD5 B1
SIORXD_5 5 6 12 1 7 TP452 D6 8 12 BD6 A3
.S
DGND 8 TP453 D7
4 IC46 DGND 9 11 BD7 B6
R12 9
AT A D
F U BA T A_D
TP136 19 DGND A7
CS_ADC4 11 IC31 6 LAP7 2 1 13 RA1 10 ST33 RESET TP323 DGND
RESET_ST33 A6 RESET 1 B9
E C AF R ET NI S R OT A UT C A
CS_ADC5 TP151 10 SIORXD R97 LAP6 3
8 ST33
C N YI SL AI R E
TP150 TP59 VDD A5 SIOINT0 A10
CS_INT_ADC 9 TP365 ST33
B5 SIOINT1 9 IC37 B12
TP187 ST33 TP211
SIOCE0 17 3 B3 SIOCE0 CE_PIC0 1 IC37 8 A12
TP91 TP177 ST31
3 10
IC36 TP188 ST33 PWR_FAIL_ST31 B11 PWR_FAIL
ST30 IC44 SIOCE1 15 5 A4 SIOCE1 CE_PIC1 2
SIORXD_SENS A2 12 11 4 2 LAP6 RESET_ST31 A11 RESET
TP95
ST31
INT_SENS A5 SENSOR_INT 12 6
DRDY_SENS B5 READY_SENSOR 13 TP297 13 7 SIOINT0 TP212
RESET B6 RESET_ST30 11 5
IC37
B3 TP144 3 IC31 5 LAP7 TP39 OE 13
CS_ADC1
TP65 11 9 SIOINT1 IC37 VDD
CS_ADC2 A3 4 6 TP201 TP364
_B
B4 TP148 5 19 TP413
SU
CS_ADC3
17 3
A6 TP193
GND A4 DGND TP48
B1 FC53 TP261 ST36 R142 TP414
ST30 VDD A4 VDD DGND 15 5
25
R
11
ST36
IC48
7R
CS_ADC3 B5 VDD
1
DGND ST36 OE TP83 ST31
5R1
CS_ADC2 B1 VCC 13 7 B10 OE
FC54 ST36
10/2009
CS_ADC1 DGND A1 VCC
L O RT N O C
C
TP322 B3 ST36 WE TP80 ST31
2
P_IICSDA 11 9 A9 WE
I
R13 ST36 R150
DGND A3 DGND
S U B L EL L A R A P T X E
DGND ST36 VDD 9 IC46 19 SENSOR_INT

ST50 IC44 B4 DGND TP54
CE_PIC0 8 LAP6
10.7.6 Schematic (Interfaces Sheet 6/6)
SIORXD_SR A2 9 8 ST36 10 8 ACTOR_INT

B2 DGND
E C A F R E T NI R OS N E S
TP313 CE_PIC1 TP195
INT_SR A5 INT_SR ST36 11
SYNC_SR B5 SYNC_SR 10 A5 DGND ST31
01
B6 DGND INT_ACTOR 18 2 B8 INT0
0R
RESET RESET_ST50 R146 ST36
IC46 7 LAP7 A6 DGND TP284
CS_AXIS_CONTR0 B3 3 ST36
A2 P_IICSCL INT_SENSOR ST31
CS_AXIS_CONTR1 A3 4 6 TP298 3 ST36 16 IC48 4 A8 INT1
8 T2 D10 B6 RESET TP285
CS_PIO_SR B4 5 TP367 DRDY_ADC1
A6
01
GND A4 DGND 2 TP334 ST35 1 2 3 14 6
1R
B1 IICSDA C86 B3 P_IICSDA
89
99
1 3
R
R
ST50 ST35
0
1
A3 DGND
CS_PIO_SR IC47 2 ST35 12 8
IICSCL B4 DGND JP1
CS_AXIS_CONTR1 7 5 ST35 DGND
OI S S
TP372 DGND B2 DGND 1
CS_AXIS_CONTR0 IC40 6 ST35 CONTROL BUS
C
E C CI_P
E C CI_P
C136 A5 DGND TP82 ST31

2
D13 3 ST35 A6 CE_PIC0

I
E C AF RT NI I B O R
TP308 2 A6 DGND ST31
SMART_SENSE_RXD TP333 ST35 B7 CE_PIC1
3 4 E5 A2 P_IICSCL TP78
2 TP196
ST35
1 E5 RESET_ST35 B6 RESET
DGND DGND
CS_SMART_RIGHT ST35
A4 VDD
FC49 TP373 ST35
11
VDD B5 VDD
8R
SMART_SENSE_CLK TP304 18 2
TP250 IC40 TP266
SMART_SENSE_TXD TP307 17 3 5 IC48 DGND
ST50 6 DGND ST35 20 VDD 10 DGND
SIOCLK_SR A1 TP30 16 4 B1 VCC
ST50 FC50 TP248 ST35 IC46
SIOTXD_SR B2 TP31 15 IC30 5 SIOTXD TP254 4 A1 VCC 14 VDD 7 DGND
ST30 SIOCLK
SIOCLK_SENS A1 TP330 14 6 9 IC40 TP268
ST30 DRAWN 6.4.06 R. Birrer CAD JOB
SIOTXD_SENS B2 TP331 13 7 8 DGND
ST60 CHANGED 19.9.06 R.Birrer CHECKED AG13_70
SIOCLK_ACT A1 TP332 12 8 10
ST60 IC40
SIOTXD_ACT B2 TP276 11 9 VDD DGND WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE
TP202 IC40 TP274 14 7 Mettler-Toledo AG
1 12 IC37 OF THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
11 14 VDD 7 DGND Analytical
19 PUBLISH THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE
IC36 Sonnenbergstr. 74
13 20 VDD 10 DGND THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
VDD 8603 Schwerzenbach TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
IC32
20 VDD 10 DGND
21
61
CI 2 3
CI 7 3
CI 6 4
CI 6 3
CI 8 4
CI 4 4
CI 1 3
CI 0 3
CI 0 4
R
41
0R
5R
IC30
20 VDD 10 DGND
CI 7 4
C108 C92 C93 C134 C90 C119 C88 C89 C84 C114 C91
DGND
IC31 Processorboard EOS INTERFACES ES-51142284 A
14 VDD 7 DGND
DGND DGND IC44
DGND 14 VDD 7 DGND REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 6/6 METTLER TOLEDO

TGA/DSC 1
10-25
Drawings
R 100
C38 D21
R 39
C 91
C57
R 132
ST6 ST7
D1
D 34
E7
R45
C 54
FC18 R101
3
C39 ST36
D4
R 38
IC 9
FC20
D20
FC54
FC 53
R146 FC48
R10
C 46
FC17
IC 1 2
C37 T2 FC47
SI2 C51 D15
R 82
C36 C32 C58
C 56
C80 C81
D 10
C 86
FC16 C34 IC47 FC46 FC4 D2 R14 D16

SI1
M P1
C33
C 55
C50 IC38 D1 R43
C 147
C26 D9 FC32 D17
R 104
R 42
FC19 L2
R24 D8
D18 IC35 C49
R44
D3 IC27 LAP7
BU10 IC13
C 78
C 47
C103
R 20
C40 RA12 C53 E8
R143
RA4
L1 IC4 C52
R 147
IC23 IC24
C 13
C35 D14 IC14
IC25 C5
C28 D23
R75
R 148
E1 D12
R 41
R 40
LAP0 IC7 IC39
C31
LAP2
MP2
IC 5 2
C41
C 113
R 154
R3
R 17
SQ2 C48 R114
R 57
IC16
C112
R113 C122 C12
C 65
R144
RA5 D22
R 95
C100
R 91
C95
C 87
C 128
C116 C74
R 152 R 153
R106 IC50
C 135
C129
C16 R73 R83
LAP5
C62
IC10
C 145
C96 R81 C69
R 151
R 85
C19
R 86
IC19 R56 R67 R66
C20 C127
R 108 R 130
R112 D32 C70 R129
R 120
MP3
D7
IC17
C 59
R149
C 97
FC40
C10
R 105
R25
C104
C 120
C64
d et ni r P
C11
C9
C22
C60
C84
R88
C 102
C 63
IC20 C71 L5
C 143
IC18
R 124
C144
t s u C s c a,Pl e b a,L
ST12 R89 MP4

R 74
C3 R133 ST60 C142
R 61
C140 C21
R90 C141
C61 C 4
MP5
R 33
D25
C 17
R125 R63 D28
QS
C98 R32
R 15
R27 C99 C107 D26

R54 R80 IC30
42 x6
C8
D27 D24 C124 C130
IC 4 1
1
C 15
IC42
LBL1
R47 R127
R 69
C 88
R 11
R109 C18 C133
C 123
JP 8
R53
IC 3 3
R48
R 128
R126
R64
C2
R55 R49 T1
IC 4 9
C14 IC1 IC44
10/2009
R 62
R50
C101
C 131
C 125
FC 41
C126
FC 42
FC 34
R51 D5
R 60
R26
R 58
R 46
IC3 IC2 R23 R65
C132
R 72
R137 C1 R59
JP4
C7
JP18 C6 R70
R135 ST30
C 121
R 12
KU9
D 29
R 71
R134 R139 R103
R136 R138 ST4
IC34 C73
C75
L3 R79 C67
ST9
LAP3 RA2 IC40 C66
R68 C89 C114
FC 55
FC43
FC11
T4 C68
L7
L4
C 76
C 72
L6
R 19
ST50
LA P 1
R145
LAP6
FC57
C 110
R16
S1 FC6
JP2
R84 IC26 IC31
KL1
R13 R22
FC12
D31
C134 FC7
D 30
IC 3 7
R102
FC 56
FC3
R150 C108
IC 4 3
RA9 RA7 R111
C29
R31 FC9 BU1
C 93
R97 IC15 R141 C109

IC46 LAP4 FC5
R115 C111 R110 FC8
R140
C79
C90 C27
10.7.7 PCB Layout
RA8 R6
C 92
KL3 IC36 BU2
ST11
C106 R92
KU1
R7
R9
R4
IC48 R142
ST20
R8 R5
IC5
C 77
JP11 IC29 D35 C24 FC2
R99 ST33 C94 IC45 IC11 E4
R 131
IC21 IC6 IC8 IC22 FC1
R118
R 37
C 83
R 36
C 23
IC32 R155 IC51 R35
C 25
C119 FC33
ST31 C82
R 87
JP1 R156 JP19 FC52
R 34
RA1 R18
R122
RA21 MP6
R 30
C 85
R157
FC 27
FC45
FC 10
FC 22
FC 23
FC 36
FC 21
FC 15
FC 14
FC 37
FC 38
FC 51
FC 39
FC 25
FC 24
FC 13
R2
FC29
FC 30
FC 26
FC 31
TGA/DSC 1
C 43
C137
C 30
R98 C105 R119 R1 FC44
C 42
C 45
R29 IC28 C44
R A19
R A13
R 21 R 28
FC 28
FC 35
FC 50
KL2 E5 R52
FC 49
E3
ST35
C136 R117 ST3 ST10 ST5 ST2
Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.7.8 Jumper Settings

to Power-Supply
board to Power-Supply
BU10 board
Gas option
ST6 ST7
µPROCESSOR BOARD
ST12
To RS232 board
(Option)
JP8
1
1
ST4
1 JP4
JP18
Reset
To Analog board
ST11 1 KU1
To Ethernet board JP2
Terminal
1
JP11
JP19
JP1
ST10
1
1
ST3 ST5 ST2

ST1
to Analog to
board balance to sample to Power-Supply
changer board
Jumper Settings µProcessor Board
Type / No. JP 1 JP 2 JP 4 JP 8 JP 11 JP 18 JP 19
DSC 1 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2
TGA/DSC 1 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2 1-2 1-2

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.8 Analog Board (ES – 51 140 770)

to µ P ro cessor
bo ard
10.8.1 Connections
ST4 + 5.1 V C J sam ple tem p .
KL3
1 1 rd
2 bl SGND
to µ P ro cessor JP 9
JP11 JP10
123
2468
1357
b o ard
KL4
JP 8 JP 7
1 ye C J sam ple tem p . sensor
123
2 gn SGND
3 21 3 2 1
JP 12 JP 13
C ooling flange tem p . sensor
KL5
1 ye
1 2 1 2 2 gn SGND
JP 6

P1 T o fu rn a ce
2 4 6
1 3 5
KL2 KL7
JP 2 1 pk C J F urnace
S T3 2 gy AGND
7531
8642
1
1 wt
F urnace tem p .
ANALO G BO ARD 2 4 6
2
3 bn therm ocouple
AGND
JP 4
1 3 5
JP 5 T o b a la n ce
321
321
321
KL1 KL8
P2 1
2 4 6
1 3 5
NC
JP 1 2
7531
8642
JP17
JP18
JP19
1 wt S am ple tem p . therm ocouple

2
3 bn AGND
1 S T 11 2 4 6
JP 3
to pow er supply board 1 +5 V C J furnace tem p .
KL9 KL6
1 3 5 rd
2 bl -5 V C J furnace tem p .
1 S T1 2 gr
1 pk
NC
2
T o therm ocouple am plifier board
ST3 to µP roce sso r b oa rd ST4 to µ P rocessor bo ard S T 1 1 to po w e r su pp ly bo a rd

1 DGND 1 S H IE LD 1 +5 V
2 CS ADC1 2 R es. IN P 2 2
3 CS ADC2 3 R e s. IN P 1 3 DGND
4 CS ADC3 4 CJ TM P ERR. 4
5 DGND 5 COOL TM P ERR. 5 S e ns. e rr.
6 V ar. D et.2 6 R /L T C 6 DGND
7 V a r. D e t.1 7 M E S S /C A L T C 7
8 V ar. D et.4 8 R /L T C J 8 NC
9 C al. A D C 1/3 9 C J tem p . 9
10 DGND 10 S H IE LD 10 +15 V
11 DRDY ADC1 11 +5 V 11
12 DRDY ADC2 12 12
13 DRDY ADC3 13 DGND 13 -15 V
14 DGND 14 14
15 S C LK 15 -15 V 15
16 SDATA 16 16
17 DGND 17 +15 V 17 AGND
18 F urn error 18 18
19 S am p le error 19 AGND 19
20 D T A e rror 20 20
21 S ensor erro r 21 V R E F+ 5 V
22 R e s. IN P 1 22 SGND
23 DGND 23 T e m p. cooler
24 CAL ADC2 24 SGND
25 R es. O U T 1 25 C J tem p .
26 R es. O U T 2 26 SGND

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.8.2 Jumper settings analog board
S T4
KL3
rd
A N A LO G B O A R D
1 1
2 bl
JP9
JP10
123
2468
1357
ye
KL4
1
JP8 JP7
JP11
123
2 gn
321 321
JP 12 JP 13
ye
KL5
1
12 12 2 gn
JP6
2 4 6
1 3 5
P1 pk
KL7
1
JP2
S T3 2 gy
7531
8642
1
1 wt
KL2
2
2 4 6
3 bn
JP4
JP 5
1 3 5
KL8
2 4 6
1 3 5
P2 1
321
321
321
NC
JP1 2
7531
8642
JP17
JP18
JP19
1 wt
KL1
2
3 bn
1 S T11 2 4 6
JP 3
rd
KL6
1 3 5 1
2 bl
1
S T12
1
KL
To therm ocouple am plifier board NC
9
2
* not assembled
Jumper
JP1 JP2 JP3 JP4 JP5 JP6 JP7 JP8 *
JP9 JP10 JP11 *
JP12 JP13 JP17 JP18 JP19
Module
STD-TGA 851 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3
HT-TGA 851 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3
STD-TMA 840 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 2-3 2-3 2-3
LT-TMA 841 7-8 7-8 3-4 3-4 NC 3-4 2-3 2-3 5-6 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
DMA 861 5-6 5-6 3-4 3-4 NC 3-4 2-3 2-3 3-4 2-3 1-2 2-3 2-3 1-2
TGA1 SF/LF 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2
TGA1 HT 3-4 3-4 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2 NC 1-2 1-2 1-2 1-2

P2
ST3
+15V -15V
JP3
1 SHIELD
1
A 2 CS/ADC1
TGA/DSC 1
TP2
2 3 CS/ADC2
SAMPLE TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE KL1 AGND
4 CS/ADC3
3
5 DGND
D
6 VAR DET2
1
JP5 7 VAR DET1
KL8 8 VAR DET4

2 JP1
AGND VREF 9 CAL ADC1/3
1
+5VA P1 10

+15V -15V 11 DRDY/ADC1
KL3 AGND JP4
12 DRDY/ADC2
2 SYS REF
-5VA 1 A 13 DRDY/ADC3
TP1
2 14
FURNACE TEMPERATURE THERMOCOUPLE KL2 AGND
15 SCLK
3
D 16 SDATA
1 +5VA 17
1 18 T. HEATER ERROR
JP6
KL6 AGND
KL7 19 T. SAMPLE ERROR
2 2
-5VA 20 DTA ERROR
AGND
VREF JP2
21 SENSOR ERROR
10/2009
22 RES INP1
23
ST11 24 CAL ADC2
1 +5V 25 RES OUT1

+5V TP37
2 26 RES OUT2
3 DGND
DGND
4 TP32
REF +2.5V
+TEMP SENSOR ERROR 5 AGND +15V
-TEMP SENSOR ERROR 6 VOLTAGE TP33

+5V REF -2.5V
NC 7 +15V
NC 8
REFERENCES TP34
-15V
9 IC35 +5VA SYSREF
+15V 10
11
12 IC36 -5VA AGND
-15V 13
14 -15V
15 WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF: BY ACCEPTANCE OF
+
THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO PUBLISH
16 METTLER
+ THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE THEM AVAILABLE
17 TP42 TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION, NOR TO USE IT FOR
AGND TOLEDO
18 CH-8606 Greifensee ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED TO HIM.
19
20 ANALOG BOARD TGA/DSC 1
AGND
Sheet 1/2
Drawings
10-29
10-30
JP13 JP11
Drawings
VREF
TP64
1
1
CJ-TEMP.
+15V
SENSOR
L K 01
L K11
2
2
+15V
JP9
JP8 ST4
1 SHIELD
2 RES INP 2
3 RES INP 1
4 CJ TMP. ERROR
+5V 5 COOLER TMP. ERROR
10/2009
6 RIGHT/RLOW TC
COOLING FLANGE 7 MESS/CAL TC
JP7
TEMPERATURE 8 RIGHT/RLOW TCJ
SENSOR 9 MESS/CAL TCJ
10
1
SHIELD
11
+5V
+5V 12
13
DGND
LK 5
14
15
2
-15V
16
+15V 17
+15V
18
JP12 JP10 AGND 19
20 AGND
VREF 21 VREF
22
23
1
COOLING FLAGE TEMPERATURE
1
CJ-TEMP.
+15V 24 SGND
SENSOR TP61
25 CJ TEMPERATURE
26 SGND
LK 3
LK 4
2
2
ANALOG BOARD TGA/DSC 1

Sheet 2/2

TGA/DSC 1
TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.9 Thermocouple amplifier board (ES – 51 141 116)

10.9.1 Connections
10.9.2 Jumper settings Rev. C
C18
R26 D4 C21 C20 JP15 R34 LC1
KL12
C19 R21 R36
C23
R27 D3 R30
R37
R12
D5 IC5 R33 LC2
R35
C12 R38
IC7
C26
ST12 R32
JP17 C10 R22 C22 R31 LC3
C6
P1
IC3
KL13
C27
R28 LC4
R17 R18 R14
R16 JP14 C2
XL2
JP1 R24 C14 C13 C25

R20
R29
R3
R11
R19
D2
D1
C29 L1
R10
D6 R25 C9
R9
C11
R7
R8
IC6 R6 R1
R13 IC4
C5
KL14
C3 C1 L2
LBL1 C17 C24 C4
C8 R23 R2
C16
C15
Cust,Pacs,Label C7 R5
IC2 Printed 24x6 R4 L3
R15 JP16
JP 1 JP 14 JP 15 JP 16 JP 17
- - 3-4 3–4 -
There are some older boards in the field with a slightly different layout. The jumper settings
are the same there.

JP15
* R22 R16
D 2
10-32
8 7
JP16 +5V
JP17 1 R20
C R38
REF+2.5V 6 5 +5VA
5 3 1
Drawings
R37 R14
4 B 3
AGND DGND
8
R1
C B A A R36 14 15
REF+2.5V 2 1 3 + C13 C14
C5
R3
AGND ST12
6 4 2 12 4 10 SC1/ADC2
KL14 L1 R1 R6 1
1 3 IC3 11 17
+ ST12
C1 D1 13
1
ADC 9
R2
2 CAL ADC2
KL14 L2 -
1 20 4 SDATA
R7
01
R23
R9
R
R8
2 XL2 C3
C7 * IC4 6 9 16 6 CS/ADC2
AGND 8 C8 IC6 18
SHIELD2 7 DRDY/ADC2
Therm ocouple
6 - R11 SYSREF
5 D2 19 3 SCLK
KL14 L3 R2 R5
3 2 10 3 5 ADC_CLK
- IC3 7
AGNDS1 C9 1
C15
C4 5
5 +
R4
8 2
AGND
4
5
P1
9
7
R2
R2
R1
R1
REF-2.5V AGNDR
SP2 7 6
AGNDS1 -15V +15V C16 C17
R15
* R34 AGNDS1
10.9.3 Schematic Rev. C
JP14 AGND DGND

C * R30
5 6 -5VA
2 -
R32 R12
5
R3
B +5V
3 4 R33 6 +5V
IC5
KL13 LC3 D5 JP1
A R28
+ 2 1 2 3 +
5 R13
R31 D6
C6 1 8 IC2 1 2
ST12
92
R
11 10 11 DTA_ERROR
1 8
KL13 C11
1
-
C J TEM PER ATUR E

C2 ST12
LC4 +5V 1 +5V
AGNDS1 IC7 DGND
10/2009
C29 C12
SHIELD2
ST12
2 7 2 DGND
DGND
DGND D4 D3
KL12 LC1
PS 3
2 +5VA
DGNDS
AGND
ST12
12 SELECT
R27
+5V 13 BOARD VAR DET1
C J SU PPLY
+5V 14 BOARD VAR DET2
KL12
D N GA
* R26 15 SHIELD
1 -5VA "BOARD VAR."
16 AGND
LC2
+15V 17 +15V
-15V 18 -15V
AGND 19 AGND
+5VA 20 +5VA
SP4
-5VA 21 -5VA
+15V +5VA
AGNDS 22 AGNDS
SYSREF 23 SYSREF
C25 C23 C27 C18 C20 C19 AGNDR 24 AGNDR
REF+2.5V 25 REF+2.5V
REF-2.5V 26 REF-2.5V
C22 C24 C26 C21 C10 8 SHIELD
IC2
ST12
D N GA
1 2 CAD JOB
DRAWN 1.02.00 H.P.Pfeiffer
IC2
CHANGED 12.2.07 R.Birrer CHECKED AA16_70
-15V -5VA
3 4
Mettler-Toledo AG WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF. BY ACCEPTANCE
IC2 3 6 OF THE DOCUMENT THE RECIPIENT ACKNOWLEDGES THESE RIGHTS AND UNDERTAKES NOT TO
Analytical
5 6 PUBLISH THE DOCUMENT NOR THE SUBJECT THEREOF IN FULL OR IN PART, NOR TO MAKE
Sonnenbergstr. 74
* PARTS NOT ASSEMBLED THEM AVAILABLE TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZA-
IC2 8603 Schwerzenbach
IC7 TION, NOR TO USE IT FOR ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED
9 8 IC3 8 +15V 4 -15V
IC2 IC4 7 +15V 4 -15V

4 5
13 12 Thermocouple Amplifier ES – 51 141 116 C
IC5 7 +15V 4 -15V
DGNDS AGND DGND
IC2 14 +5V 7 DGND REPLACES REPLACED BY PAGE 1/1 METTLER TOLEDO

TGA/DSC 1
TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.10 Cold junction furnace temperature board

Furnace temperature
thermocouple
bn wt
PtRh (long wire)

Pt (short wire)
Cooling flange
temp. sensor
PTC
- +
1 2
gn KL1 pk
KL5
2 LA2 LA1 1
ye gy
1 KL4 2
KL3
bn
wt
2 KL2 2 1
1
rd bl
KL no. color signal value
1 wt -Pt
1 0.111 ....11.85
2 or +PtRh mV for
20....1100 °C
1 wt Furnace temperature
2
2 bn SGND SGND
1 bl -5 VC -5 Volt
3
2 rd +5 VC +5 Volt
1 ye PTC sensor appr. 2 kOhm
4
2 gn SGND at 25 °C
1 pk CJ temperature Signal OUT
5
2 gy AGND 10mV / °C

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
Alu bloc
KL1 KL2
2 1
Furnace temperature
Furnace temperature
thermocouple
KL1 KL2
1 2
Furnace temperature
+5VA
KL5
CJ temp.
sensor
1
CJ temperature
AGND
Jumper
-5VA
AGND
KL3
-5VA 1
-5VA
KL5
AGND 2 AGND
KL3
2
+5VA +5VA
LA1 KL4
1
PTC
Cooling flange
temperature sensor
LA2 KL4
2
WE RESERVE ALL RIGHTS IN THIS DOCUMENT AND IN THE SUBJECT THEREOF : BY ACCEPTANCE OF
TOLEDO TO ANY THIRD PARTY WITHOUT OUR PRIOR EXPRESS WRITTEN AUTHORIZATION , NOR TO USE IT FOR
ANY PURPOSE OTHER THAN FOR WHICH IT WAS DELIVERED TO HIM .
CH-8606 Greifensee
CJ-FURNACE TGA/DSC 1
Sheet 1/1

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.11 Cold junction sample temperature board

Also called “Preamplifier”, located in the balance housing.
Preamplifier Schematics Preamplifier Layout

Drawings TGA/DSC 1
10.12
2 Furnace position board
+5V
1 3
IC1
2 4
T1
closed
2 ST1
R1
R2
LC1
ST1 +5V
1
C1
C3
LC2
ST1
3
KL1
KL2
Schematics Layout

TGA/DSC 1 Drawings
10.13 Tube connections

With 400 W Furnace Power Amplifier (1100°C)
With 600 W Furnace Power Amplifier (1600°C)
Furnace
Power Furnace Cell
Amplifier
Furnace
Balance
housing

Drawings TGA/DSC 1

TGA/DSC 1 Service Information
CONTENTS PAGE
11 Service Information .......................................................................................... 11-3

11.1 Service manual updates................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Service engineers responsibility ......................................................................... 11-3
11.1.2 Status of this Service Manual ............................................................................. 11-3
First complete edition TGA/DSC 1:August 2007 (08/2007) ................................ 11-3
Second edition A:September 2008 (09/2008)..................................................... 11-3
Third edition B:October 2009 (10/2009).............................................................. 11-3
11.2 Express Service Info (ESI) ............................................................................... 11-5
11.2.1 List of Express Service Info ................................................................................ 11-5
ESI-0706 Balance transport locking device (replaced) .................................... 11-5
ESI-0709 Temporary Balance Transport Protection ........................................ 11-5
ESI-0714 Reflector Discs for High Temperature TGA’s ................................... 11-5
ESI-0715 Time base is not correct................................................................... 11-5
ESI-0716 Automatic Weigh-In aborts............................................................... 11-5
ESI-0717 New firmware version V2.03 for TGA/DSC 1 ................................... 11-5
ESI-0803A New firmware version V2.04 for TGA/DSC 1 ................................... 11-5
ESI-0806 How to increase the lifetime of the Sensors ..................................... 11-5
ESI-0808 New firmware version V2.03 for gas controller GC 100/200 ............ 11-5
ESI-0814 Which crucibles can be used with the TGA-Sorption Kit .................. 11-5
ESI-0904 TGA’s with sorption kit and humidity generator VTI RH 200 ............ 11-5
ESI-0905 Cracking may occur if cold crucible is placed on hot sensor ............ 11-5
ESI-0906 Unwanted passage between purge gas inlet and balance cell......... 11-5
ESI-0908 Wrong MAC address on the Lantronix Module ................................ 11-5

Service Information TGA/DSC 1

11 Service Information
11.1 Service manual updates
11.1.1 Service engineers responsibility
To hold the service manual up to date lies in the responsibility of the Service Engineer. The
newest manual revision is always available on the analytical information center
(WWW.mtanainfo.com). The Express Service Information will be distributed only by e-mail
and is also an integrated part of the Service Manual. Also the ESI are available on the ana-
lytical information center.
Is my service manual really up-to-date? At the bottom right of the title page you will find the
date of issue. If you know the date of the latest edition, you can thus see whether your ser-
vice manual is up-to-date.
11.1.2 Status of this Service Manual

First complete edition TGA/DSC 1: August 2007 (08/2007)
Second edition A: September 2008 (09/2008)
Many additions, improvements and corrections
Third edition B: October 2009 (10/2009)

Small corrections and supplementation, especially part numbers


11.2 Express Service Info (ESI)

11.2.1 List of Express Service Info
ESI-0706 Balance transport locking device (replaced)
ESI-0709 Temporary Balance Transport Protection
ESI-0714 Reflector Discs for High Temperature TGA’s
ESI-0715 Time base is not correct
ESI-0716 Automatic Weigh-In aborts
ESI-0717 New firmware version V2.03 for TGA/DSC 1
ESI-0803A New firmware version V2.04 for TGA/DSC 1
ESI-0806 How to increase the lifetime of the Sensors
ESI-0808 New firmware version V2.03 for gas controller GC 100/200
ESI-0814 Which crucibles can be used with the TGA-Sorption Kit
ESI-0904 TGA’s with sorption kit and humidity generator VTI RH 200
ESI-0905 Cracking may occur if cold crucible is placed on hot sensor
ESI-0906 Unwanted passage between purge gas inlet and balance cell
ESI-0908 Wrong MAC address on the Lantronix Module


Express Service Information TGA/DSC 1

October 24, 2007
Balance transport locking device
1. Problem description:
• We had to learn, that some balances in the field, had been damaged during transporta-
tion. The cause of this damage was a too softly tightened balance transport locking
device.
2. Solution:
• Please tighten the balance transport locking device with a torque between 1.2 and 1.5 N,
or in other words, fairly tight, but within reason.
If you are unsure how much that is, you can use the Torque wrenches from the DMA
accessories box with a T 10 Torx insert.
ME- 51 191 122 Torque wrenches (fixed transfer price 540 Swiss francs).



November 09, 2007
Temporary Balance Transport Protection
• Some of the new TGA/DSC 1 instruments got damaged during shipping (bent link or mis-
adjusted alignment). The newly designed transport locking device seems not to protect
the balance well enough.
2. Reason:
• The new balance design allows for an easy exchange of the sensor without opening the
balance housing. Thus the former transport protection had to be redesigned. It was also
designed in a way that it was very easy to be installed or removed.

3. Solution:
• We came up with a temporary solution for a balance transport protection which consists
of two different pieces of plastic foam.
• The description VS-51142010-Service explains how to remove the transport protection.
• If you need to ship a TGA/DSC 1 which still has the old transport locking device, do not
use it any more but protect it by two pieces of plastic foam. Use the above mentioned de-
scription in the reverse order.
• Use the white plastic foam from a TGA/SDTA851e balance and the yellow plastic foam
from a robot protection.
• Fold the yellow piece of plastic foam close to the middle, the shorter part facing outwards
4. Important Information:
• This ESI replaces the ESI 0706
• Do not use the transport locking device any more
• If you need a set of this transport protection, please contact tafps.help@mt.com
• Retain the two pieces of plastic foam in case the TGA/DSC 1 needs to be transported in
the future.


November 23, 2007
Reflector Discs for High Temperature TGA’s
The material of the cell reflector discs (hanging on the gas pipe / part no ME – 51 142 034)
cause the melting temperature of palladium (1554 °C) to be lowered if an inert gas (e.g. Ni-
trogen) is used as purge gas. The palladium is not affected if the gas contains oxygen (e.g.
air).
2. Reason:
The reflector discs were changed to an aluminum nitride based material because they are
less sensitive to temperature shocks.
3. Solution:
• Be aware that at high temperatures released Aluminum from the reflector discs could af-
fect the measurement.
• A new material – based on aluminum oxide - was evaluated and is now used for
TGA/DSC 1s (ID numbers >150).
• On instruments with ID numbers ≤150 change the reflector discs to the new types as
soon as they are available.
• There is no need for action on any LF or SF TGA/DSC 1.
• Do not calibrate the instrument with palladium and an inert gas atmosphere. Use air.
• The new reflector discs will be sent to the MOs which got HT instruments with the faulty
discs automatically (ID numbers ≤150). This will happen in mid December.
• The furnace outlet reflector discs (part no ME – 51 142 136) are not affected.
• Please contact TAFPS.help@mt.com if you’re not sure whether a certain instrument has
this problem or not.



November 23, 2007
Time Base is not correct
The time base of the TGA/DSC 1 is off by about 3%. This means that a segment with a
duration of 10 min. will last about 10 min. 18 s.
2. Solution:
• This problem has to be corrected with a firmware update.
• This update will be available early December
• A service engineer will have to load the new firmware onto every TGA/DSC 1 module
by using the TAServiceTool (see chapter 5 of the TGA/DSC 1 service manual).
3. Notes:
• Users who are using hyphenated techniques (FTIR, MS) are affected the most. For
instance the TA measurement duration is longer than the corresponding MS experiment.
• For most users this behavior will not be a big issue.



November 23, 2007
Automatic Weigh-In aborts
The function “Weigh In Auto” only weighs the first sample and then stops. An hour glass is
shown on the PC, the module is in idle mode. The “Weigh In” function can be left by clicking
on “cancel”.
2. Solution:
• This problem has to be corrected with a firmware update.
• This update will be available early December
• A service engineer will have to load the new firmware onto every TGA/DSC 1 module by
using the TAServiceTool (see chapter 5 of the TGA/DSC 1 service manual).



November 29, 2007
New firmware version V2.03 for TGA/DSC 1
• Problem with incorrect time base (see details in ESI-0715)
• Problem with automatic weight in (see details in ESI-0716)
• The time out time of the heater control at the end of all experiments is not adjustable
2. Solution:
• Download the new firmware version (V2.03) from the extranet
• Install it on all TGA/DSC 1 in the field
• The firmware must be upgraded on all TGA/DSC 1 in the field!
• It is factory installed on instruments with ID number 168 and higher
• The problems explained in ESI-0715 and ESI-0716 are solved
• The time out time of the furnace heater/cooler control is now adjustable via the SmartSens
Terminal at the end of the module setup. The default value is 60 min and the adjustment
range is very wide.
• With the earlier introduced firmware V2.02 the use of another type of AD-Converter on the
processor board was enabled. This has not affected existing instruments in the field and
therefore no separate Express Service Info was introduced



April 16, 2008
New firmware version V2.04 for TGA/DSC 1
1. Benefits compared to earlier versions:

• It is now possible to install a DSC HSS2 Sensor in combination with a TGA/DSC 1 Large
Furnace Instrument (STAR Software Version 9.20 or higher required!). Until now it was
e
only possible to install the DSC HSS2 Sensor in combination with TGA/DSC 1 HT
(1600 °C) instruments.
2. Solved problems:
• Under certain circumstances, especially when updating form an earlier version, the system
configuration did not show the PID values for the furnace setting and the min/max tem-
perature of the furnace correctly.
• Important to notice is the fact that also with an earlier firmware the instrument worked with-
out problems, only the information on the above mentioned values were sometimes un-
available on the SmartSens terminal or within the service software.
3. Solution:
• Download the new firmware version (V2.04) from the extranet
• Install it on all TGA/DSC 1 in the field
• We highly recommend an update on TGA/DSC 1 in the field
• For using a DSC HSS2 sensor together with a TGA/DSC 1 Large Furnace Instrument,
the STAR Software Version 9.20 or higher is required.
e
• For an upgrade from an SDTA FRS2 sensor to the DSC HSS2 sensor the thermo-
couple amplifier kit ME – 51 142 483 is required.



May 30, 2008
How to increase the lifetime of the sensors
Since we are using the Quality-Monitoring System, which collects data of exchanged parts, we re-
alized that the TGA sensors are relatively often exchanged.
If the sample overflows, then the crucible often sticks to the sensor. If the crucible is then
removed using force, it can damage the sensor.
2. Solution:
There are two main points to consider in order to increase the lifetime of the sensor.
• To prevent the sample from overflowing
• And if it happens nevertheless, how to remove residues of such an overflowing sample
How to prevent an unknown sample from overflowing
• If there is a muffle furnace in the lab, the sample can be relatively risk free heated up
in there and you might learn about unexpected reactions (e.g. for unknown foams).
• Use a sapphire crucible or at least a sapphire disc between the crucible and sensor.
• Use a smaller amount of the unknown sample.

How to remove residues of an over flown sample
• First decompose material on the sensor before you mechanically try to clean the sur-
face. Heat the furnace up to it’s maximum temperature for 10 minutes using air or
oxygen as a method (purge) gas.
• Remove the crucible very carefully, the crucible can best be removed when the fur-
nace is still hot.


May 30, 2008
New firmware version V2.03 for gas controller GC 100/200
Some gas controllers could not hold the gas flow within the tolerance band over a longer
period of time. Therefore green brackets where shown on the curves of the STARe soft-
ware.
2. Solution:
• Download the new firmware version V2.03 from the extranet www.mtanainfo.com
• Download the flashloader for gas controller from the extranet
• We highly recommend an update on all installed gas controllers in the field
3. Important information:
• The flashloader for gas controller is needed to upload the new firmware version V2.3
to the gas controller
• In order to bring the gas controller into boot modus you need to press the very small
white button on the left hand side from the UBS connection.
• The monitor signal must be green OK: as shown in the following screen shot
• Choose your Com port and 9600 bauds for the baud rate

• Go to Program & Verify


December 19, 2008
Which crucibles can be used with the TGA-Sorption Kit
• The TGA-Sorption Kit, which is available for the TGA/DSC 1 with the Large furnace
cannot be used in conjunction with any crucible higher than 7.0 mm
• The 900 µl Alox crucible is higher tan 7.0 mm
• For instruments equipped with DTA or DSC sensors all crucibles which are allowed
for those sensors can be used. The 900 µl Alox crucible is not allowed for DTA and
DSC sensors.
• For instruments equipped with the SDTA senor the 900 µl Alox crucible cannot be
used together with the Sorption kit.



February 27, 2009
TGA’s with sorption kit and humidity generator VTI RH 200
• The relative humidity generator RH 200 from VTI can only control the humidity accu-
rately if the flow rate is set to 200 ml/min
• For this reason we have changed the IQ/OQ for the Sorption Accessory accordingly



February 27, 2009
Cracking may occur if cold crucible is placed on hot sensor
If a cold crucible is placed upon a hot sensor the ceramic might crack due to the extreme
differences in temperatures
The bigger the crucible and the sample weight the likelier it might occur.
2. Solution:
Do not open the furnace at temperatures higher than 500 °C, unless it’s absolutely neces-
sary
Do not press RESET at temperatures higher than 500 °C when the system is equipped with
a sample robot, otherwise the robot removes the crucible at the current temperature which
might be higher than 500 °C.

With STARe software option METHOD WINDOW
For fist segments with a start temperature above 500 °C program the sample insert tempera-
ture below 500 °C.
In the Method window choose Miscellaneous/Insert-Remove
The Insert-Remove dialog box appears
Without STARe software option METHOD WINDOW
Do not program a fist segment with a start temperature higher than 500 °C
• The automatic sample insert temperature is the same as the start temperature of the first
segment.
• The automatic sample remove temperature is the same as the end temperature of the fi-
nal segment. If the end temperature of the last segment is higher than 500 °C the soft-
ware waits for the removal of the crucible until the furnace is at 500 °C to protect an
opening at a very high temperature.


February 27, 2009
Unwanted passage between purge gas inlet and balance cell
We have discovered that there is an unwanted passage between the purge gas inlet and the
balance.
2. Solution:
Use the reactive gas inlet for the method gas
If the customer wants to use the purge gas inlet you need to seal it with help of a M4 x 6mm
grub screw.
Uninstall the sensor and gas capillary.
Take off the gas supply as shown in the pic-

ture.
Take a M4 x 6 mm grub screw and put a little

bit of 1 component adhesive on the grub
screw in order to seal properly.

Screw in the grub screw until it is flush with

the balance cell.
Remount the gas supply and the sensor.
• We recommend to seal this hole during the next scheduled service visit
• All TGA/DSC 1 with a Calibration number ≥ 459 do not have this hole anymore


July 30, 2009
Wrong MAC address on the Lantronix Module
About 5 to 10 instruments, DSC 1 and TGA/DSC 1 are concerned, left our factory with a
wrong MAC address printed on the Lantronix-Module. See picture on the right hand side.
2. Solution:
There will be no problem if you use the MAC address which is printed on the CQ (Con-
struction Qualification) sheet which is delivered with the instrument.
There will be no problem if you use the MAC address written directly on the board encircled
in green in the picture on the left hand side.




TGA/DSC 1 Operating Instructions
CONTENTS PAGE
12 Operating Instructions ..................................................................................... 12-3

12.1 Instrument ......................................................................................................... 12-3
12.1.1 TGA/DSC 1......................................................................................................... 12-3
12.2 TA-Logbook ...................................................................................................... 12-3
12.3 Options .............................................................................................................. 12-3
12.3.1 Universal sample robot ....................................................................................... 12-3
12.3.2 Gas Controller .................................................................................................... 12-3
12.3.3 TGA-MS Interface Kit ......................................................................................... 12-3
12.3.4 SmartSens Terminal ........................................................................................... 12-3
12.4 Accessories ...................................................................................................... 12-3
12.4.1 Crucible sealing press ........................................................................................ 12-3

Operating Instructions TGA/DSC 1

TGA/DSC 1 Operating Instructions
12 Operating Instructions
12.1 Instrument
12.1.1 TGA/DSC 1
ME – 51 710 524 English Version
ME – 51 710 523 German Version
12.2 TA-Logbook
ME – 51 709 755 Basic part English version
ME – 51 710 435 TGA part English Version
ME – 51 710 456 Design Qualification part English Version
12.3 Options
12.3.1 Universal sample robot
12.3.2 Gas Controller

12.3.3 TGA-MS Interface Kit

12.3.4 SmartSens Terminal

12.4 Accessories
See also operating manual section 12
12.4.1 Crucible sealing press

ME – 00 709 301 E/G/F Version

Operating Instructions TGA/DSC 1
— End of this service manual —

Tga 1 2010 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Tga 1 2010 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

-

Branch Office Schwerzenbach

METTLER TOLEDO Thermal Analysis

Mettler-Toledo AG 2007-2009 ME-51710474B, Printed in Switzerland Date of issue: October 2009

Current status of service manual

3 Spare Parts Generations

− Instrument / System layout

4 Theory of Block diagram

− Service manual updates

1 General ................................................................................................................ 1-3

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-1

— This page remains blank —

1-2 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-3

1.1.2 Instrument Safety

1.1.3 Electrical Power Safety

1-4 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

1.1.4 Compressed Gases Safety

Handling & Use

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-5

1-6 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

1.2.1 Current waste management

Reutilization Reprocessing Treatment

Pretreatment (dismantle, sort, shred, separate)

Repairable parts Recyclable parts Combustible parts Toxic parts

Further use Reuse Heat recovery Disposal

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-7

1.2.2 Principle of preventive action

We add to our instruments a symbol label for

1-8 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

The spare part list includes a column containing „ “ signs.

Item Description Part no. A/B

The „ ...“ sign denotes that:

1) Repair Repair the spare part or component.

Example: Disposing of a spare part

This spare part consists of metal, ceramics and rubber (O-rings).

We thank you for considering these environmental issues.

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-9

1.3 Organization of this service manual

Instrument types covered by this Service Manual

Service Manual updates

Express Service Information (ESI)

1-10 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

— This page remains blank —

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 1-11

— End of this section —

1-12 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

2 Installation / IQ/OQ ........................................................................................... 2-3

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 2-1

— This page remains blank —

2-2 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

The TGA/DSC 1 is designed to operate trouble-free at temperatures between +10 °C and

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

Service Manual ME-51710474B 10/2009 2-3

2.2 Installation requirements

2.2.2 Mains connections

Voltage During factory assembly, the instrument is built for 115 V or

2.2.3 Thermostat (Cryostat)

2.2.4 Gas supplies

2-4 10/2009 Service Manual ME-51710474B

Information: The TGA/DSC 1 is shipped in several parts. This requires an installa-

2.3.1 Installing the instrument

Heating connector for SF and LF Heating connector for HT